ZCL Volume 2

ZCL
Operators
Manual,
ZCL Operators Manual,

Volume 2
2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation
Part No. 161335
October 2003
2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation

All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation
Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com
Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3Dview, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC,
ARIES, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat,
CDDM, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant, Corporate Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, DataStar, DBPlot,
Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace
Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace TrackPlanner,
DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme,
DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite,
DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube,
EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, Engineer's Desktop, EOS-PAK, EPM, Executive Assistant, FastTrack, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus,
GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design,
Landmark logo and Design, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep,
Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MultiWell, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenOrigin, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks,
OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC, ProMAX,
ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF,
QUIKCDP, QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, Real Freedom,
Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-Time Asset Management Centre, Real Time Knowledge Company,
Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks MultiView, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisXchange, Sierra,
Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataAmp, StrataSim,
StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team Workspace, TeamView, TERAS,
Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP,
VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement,
VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, Xsource, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus
are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Landmark
ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2
Contents

Process Descriptions continued from Volume 1
Nadcon ..........................................................................................................
()
NIV Time to Depth ........................................................................................

(NIVA)
North Arrow ..................................................................................................

(N ARR)
Orthogonal Contours ...................................................................................

(FLOWLINES)
Overlay ..........................................................................................................
()
13
Overpost Resolve .........................................................................................

(RESOLVE OVERPLOT)
15
Patch Grid .....................................................................................................

(GRID PATCHING)
21
Picture ...........................................................................................................
(PICT)
22
Picture Assembly .........................................................................................

(ASSM)
34
Picture Stats .................................................................................................

(PIC STATS)
36
Point Gridding ..............................................................................................

(P GRD)
40
Point Grid Plus .............................................................................................

(THROW GRIDDING)
47
R2003.12.0
Contents
iii
Landmark
Polygon Clip .................................................................................................

(CLIP POLYGON)
62
Post Data .......................................................................................................

(DATA POSTING)
64
Post Data New ..............................................................................................

(DATA POSTING NEW)
66
Post Data to ZGF ..........................................................................................
99
Post DLS ....................................................................................................... 100

(DLS POSTING)
Post Grid Nodes ........................................................................................... 103
(GRID POSTING)
Post Lattice ................................................................................................... 105
(LATTICE POSTING)
Post Lease .................................................................................................... 106
(LEASE POSTING)
Post Lines ..................................................................................................... 112
(DRAW LINES)
Post NTS ....................................................................................................... 115
(NTS POSTING)
Post Seismic ................................................................................................. 123
(SEISMIC POSTING)
Post Seismic New ........................................................................................ 132
(SEISMIC POST NEW)
Post Star Symbol ......................................................................................... 147
(STAR SYMBOL POST)
Post Text ....................................................................................................... 150
(P TEXT)
Projection ...................................................................................................... 152
(PROJ)
R2003.12.0
Contents
iv
Landmark
Projection End .............................................................................................. 155

(E PRJ)
Quality Assure .............................................................................................. 156
(CP GRID QA)
Quick Volumetrics ........................................................................................ 159
(QUICK VOL)
Random Grid ................................................................................................ 161
(GRIDRAND)
Range Edit .................................................................................................... 164
()
Rasterize Faults ............................................................................................ 166
(FLT RASTER)
Reinitialize .................................................................................................... 167
(INIT)
Rename MFD ................................................................................................ 168
(CHANGE MFD NAME)
Rename Pict .................................................................................................. 169
(REN PIC)
Reset Cell To Well ........................................................................................ 170
(CELL VAL = WELL VAL)
Rotate Data ................................................................................................... 171
(ROTA)
Scale Bar ....................................................................................................... 173
(SCAL)
Scale Bias LNAR .......................................................................................... 175
(S B LNAR)
Seis Append XY ............................................................................................ 177
(APPEND XY)
R2003.12.0
Contents
Landmark
Seis Interp Thin ............................................................................................ 179

(SEIS THIN)
Select ............................................................................................................. 191
(DATA SUBSETTING)
Select Seismic Data To Post ....................................................................... 209
Shaded Relief ............................................................................................... 210
(RELIEF SHADING)
Show Files .................................................................................................... 212
(LIST FILES)
Single Data Ops ............................................................................................ 214
(DATA TO DATA)
Single Grid Ops ............................................................................................ 218
(GRID TO GRID)
Sort ................................................................................................................ 221
()
Spawn ............................................................................................................ 223
()
Squash MFD ................................................................................................. 225
(COMPRESS MFD)
Squash ZGF .................................................................................................. 226
(COMPRESS ZGF)
Stop ............................................................................................................... 227
()
Surface Intersect .......................................................................................... 228
(INTERSECT SURFS)
Surfaces Diagram ......................................................................................... 229
(Z3D)
Syntax Only .................................................................................................. 249
(SYNTAX)
R2003.12.0
Contents
vi
Landmark
System Parms .............................................................................................. 250

()
Text ................................................................................................................ 251
(TXT)
Thin Text Fields ............................................................................................ 253
(REMOVE CHAR DUPS)
Thinning ........................................................................................................ 254
(THIN)
Three D Time To Depth ................................................................................ 257
(T T D I)
Three D Timeslice ........................................................................................ 258
(TSLICE)
Time Migration .............................................................................................. 260
(TIME MIGR)
Title Block ..................................................................................................... 263
(T BLK)
Transform Coords ........................................................................................ 265
(T COORD)
Trend Gridding ............................................................................................. 267
(TREND)
Tri Scaling ..................................................................................................... 270
(SCALE XY)
User Grid Filter ............................................................................................. 272
(USER FILTER)
Vel Fun Time To Depth ................................................................................ 276
(T T D II)
Velocity Gridding ......................................................................................... 278
(GRID VEL)
R2003.12.0
Contents
vii
Landmark
Volume Report .............................................................................................. 280

(VOL REPORT)
Volumetrics ................................................................................................... 286
(VOLM)
Water Saturation .......................................................................................... 289
(AVERAGE SW GRID)
Write Cell Table ............................................................................................ 292
(WRITE CELL FILE)
Write Resin Faults ........................................................................................ 294
(WRITE FAULTS)
Write Resin Wells ......................................................................................... 295
(WRITE WELL FILE)
Write Text ...................................................................................................... 297
(PUT INFO)
ZGF Info ........................................................................................................ 300
()
R2003.12.0
Contents
viii
Landmark
Nadcon
Name
NADCON
Alternate Name
Function
This process converts NAD27 latitudes and longitudes to NAD83

latitudes and longitudes and vice versa.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FILEIN
C*24
Input file name.
FILEOUT
C*24
Output file name.
MFDIN
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input file.

Default Value = 0
MFDOUT
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output file.

Default Value = 0
INFLDLT
Field number of the Latitude field in the input data file.

Default Value = First field of the correct type
INFLDLN
Field number of the Longitude field in the input data file.

FLDNAMLT C*20
Name of the output field to receive converted latitude

values.
FLDNAMLN C*20
Name of the output field to receive converted longitude

values.
DIRECT
Conversion type.
Default Value = 27TO83
Options:
ZNON
R2003.12.0
Range Description and Defaults
C*8
27TO83
= Convert from NAD27 to NAD83
83TO27
= Convert from NAD83 to NAD27
Null data value for the file being created.

Default Value = ZNON value of the input file.
Process
Landmark
NIV Time to Depth

Name
NIV TIME TO DEPTH
Alternate Name NIVA

Function
This process performs Time to Depth conversion using normalized

interval velocities on data or grid files. In the case of a data file, the
input file needs to contain the isochrons, the normalized interval
velocities, and the top horizon depths. For grids, this information is
input as three grids.
Example
for data input:
C
This example creates 3 new fields in the output file containing the
C
top-lapped base depths, the base depths, and interval velocities.
C
NIVA:20,00 DATAIN =EXAMPLE INPUT,
DATAOUT =EXAMPLE OUTPUT,
MFDATOUT=
ISOFLD =2,
TOPFLD
= 1,
NVELFLD =
LAPNAME =TOP-LAPPED BASE DPTH,
BASENAME=
DEPTH,
LAPFLD =-1,
BASEFLD =-1,
VELNAME =INTERVAL VELOCITY,
VELFLD =
ONEORTWO=1,
TIMEUNIT = 1,
MINVEL =
NORMDEP =2000.0, INVCMPR = 1.865 /
2,
3,
BASE
-1,
8500.0,
ZCL can be instructed to write the output data field numbers into a
ZCL Data Block so that other processes can access this information.
Create a DATA BLOCK that contains at least three INTEGER
locations.
DATA BLOCK:10,00 HOWMANY =3, DATATYPE=INTEGER, DATASIZE = 1 /
C
NIVA:20,00 DATAIN =EXAMPLE INPUT,
DATAOUT =EXAMPLE OUTPUT,
MFDATOUT= 2,
ISOFLD =2,
TOPFLD
= 1,
NVELFLD = 3,
LAPNAME =TOP-LAPPED BASE DPTH,
BASENAME= BASE
DEPTH,
LAPFLD =-1,
BASEFLD =-1,
VELNAME =INTERVAL VELOCITY,
VELFLD = -1,
ONEORTWO=1,
TIMEUNIT = 1,
MINVEL = 8500.0,
NORMDEP =2000.0, INVCMPR = 1.865 DNUM
= 10 /
R2003.12.0
Process
Landmark
By specifying DNUM=10 in the NIV Process, the user has specified

that DATA BLOCK 10 is filled in the following manner:
Location
1
Information Present
Field number for the top-lapped base depth data in the output
data file, defaulted to 0 (no field is output)
Field number for the base depth data in the output data file,
defaulted to 0 (no field is output)
Field number for the interval velocity data in the output data file,
defaulted to 0 (no field is output)
2
3
Example
for grid input:

NIVA:20,00
ISOGRDI =TIME ISOCHRON,

TOPGRDI =TOP FORMATION,
NVELGRDI=NORM.INT.VELOCITY,
LAPGRDO =TOP-LAPPED BASE DEPTH,
BASEGRDO=BASE DEPTH,
VELGRDO =INTERVAL VELOCITY,
MFDBASE =2,
MFDVEL
=2,
MFDLAP
ONEORTWO=1,
TIMEUNIT =1,
MINVEL
=2,
=
8500.0,
NORMDEP =2000.0,
INVCMPR
=1.865 /
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range Description and Default
ISOGRDI
C*24
Grid
files
Name of the input isochron grid. Required if the input is

from grids.
MFDISO
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input isochron grid.

Default Value = 0
TOPGRDI
C*24
Grid
files
Name of the input horizon top depth grid. Required if

input is from grids.
MFDTOP
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input horizon top

depth grid.
Default Value = 0
NVELGRDI
C*24
Grid
files
Name of the input normalized interval velocity grid.

Required if input is from grids.
MFDNVEL
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input normalized

interval velocity grid.
Default Value = 0
C*24
Fault
files
Name of the input horizon top depth fault file. Required if

DATAIN is blank.
TOPFLT
R2003.12.0
Process
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MFDTOPF
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input horizon top

depth fault file.
Default Value = 0
C*24
Fault
files
Name of the input normalized interval velocity fault file.

Required if DATAIN is blank.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input normalized

interval velocity fault file.
Default Value = 0
C*24
Data
files
Name of the input data file. Required if data is not from

grids, i.e., ISOGRDI, TOPGRDI, and NVELGRDI are
not used.
MFDATIN
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.

Default Value = 0
LAPGRDO
C*24
NVELFLT
MFDNVELD
DATAIN
MFDLAP
Name of the output top-lapped base depth grid.

Default Value = Blank
05
BASEGRDO C*24
MFDBASE
VELGRDO
C*24
MFDVEL
DATAOUT
C*24
MFDATOUT
LAPNAME
I
C*20
BASENAME C*20
R2003.12.0
Number of the MFD to contain the output top-lapped base

depth grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output base depth grid.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output base depth grid.

Default Value = 0
Name of the output interval velocity grid.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output interval

velocity grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output data file. Required if input is from
data file.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the output top-lapped base depth field.
Name of the output base depth field.
Process
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LAPNAME
C*20

Name of the output interval velocity field.
ISOFLD
Field number for the isochron data in the input data file.
Required if input is from data.
TOPFLD
Field number for the horizon top depth data in the input
data file. Required if input is from data.
NVELFLD
Field number for the normalized interval velocity data in

the input data file. Required if input is from data.
LAPFLD
Field number for the top-lapped base depth data in the

output file.
Default Value = 0
Range Options:
<0 = Create a new field
0 = Do not output field
>0 = Overwrite specified field
BASEFLD
Field number for the base depth data in the output data
file.
Default Value = 0
Range Options: Same as LAPFLD
VELFLD
Field number for the interval velocity data in the output

data file.
Default Value = 0
Range Options: Same as LAPFLD
ONEORTWO
12
One way or two way time flag.

Default Value = 2
Options:
1 = One way time
2 = Two way time
TIMEUNIT
12
Units of time flag.

Default Value = 1
Options:
1 = Seconds
2 = Milliseconds
R2003.12.0
MINVEL
Minimal interval velocity.
NORMDEP
Normalization depth.
INVCMPR
Inverse compression factor, i.e., N of 1/N.
Process
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DNUM
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
I

Use number for the output DATA BLOCK Process. The
DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is non-zero
and the DATA BLOCK already exists. Field numbers for
newly created fields would be written to such a Data
Block.
Process
Landmark
North Arrow
Name
NORTH ARROW
Alternate Name N ARR

Function
This process draws a North Arrow (LGB type 10) on a picture.
Notes
The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file

and picture before this process is used.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
XEND1
The x location of the bottom (feathers) of the arrow.

Required if SPECIFY = END.
YEND1
The y location of the bottom (feathers) of the arrow.

Required if SPECIFY = END.
XEND2
The x location of the top (point) of the arrow. Required if

SPECIFY = END.
YEND2
The y location of the top (point) of the arrow. Required if

SPECIFY = END.
XCENTER
The x location of the center point of the arrow. Used if

SPECIFY = CENTER.
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm
YCENTER
The y location of the center point of the arrow. Used if

SPECIFY = CENTER.
HEIGHT
Height (length) of the arrow, in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if SPECIFY = CENTER.
ROTATE
0.0
360.0
Clockwise rotation from vertical of the arrow, in degrees.

Used if map is not projected and SPECIFY = CENTER.
Default Value = 0.0 degrees
Process
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SPECIFY
C*8
UNITS
R2003.12.0
C*12

Method for locating the arrow.
Default Value = CENTER
Options:
END
= Endpoints (XEND1, YEND1, XEND2,

YEND2) are supplied.
CENTER
= Center point (XCENTER, YCENTER) is

supplied.
Units for expressing the coordinates of the points.

Default Value = UNSCALED
Options:
SCALED
= Engineering or user coordinates
UNSCALED
= Plotter units
Process
Landmark
Orthogonal Contours
Name
ORTHOGONALCONTOURS
Alternate Name FLOWLINES

Function
This process produces orthogonal contours or flowlines. Flowlines

are curves that represent the flow of fluid updip and/or downdip over a
gridded surface.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
GRIDIN
C*24
MFDGRIDIN
STARTPNT
STOPLINE
C*24
MFDSTOP
FAULTS
C*24
MFDFAULT I
R2003.12.0
0-5
C*20
Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.

Default Value = 0
Name of the input startpoint file. This file must be a
DATA, VERT or FALT type file.
0-5
Number of the MFD that contains the StartPoint data.

Default Value = 0
Name of the input stopline file. This file must be a
DATA, VERT or FALT type file.
0-5
Number of the MFD that contains the stopline file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file. This must be a VERT or
FALT type file.
0-5
C*24
MFDOUTLN I
ZFIELD
Name of the input GRID file.
C*24
MFDSTART i
OUTLINES
Number of the MFD that contains the fault file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the output Flowline Profile DATA type file.
0-5
Number of the MFD that contains the output file.

Default Value = 1
Name of the Z-field to add to the output file.
If no name is specified, no Z field will be added. If a field
of this type exists on the input StartPoint file, it will be
used.
Process
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DIPANGFD
C*20
Name of the DipAngle field to add to the output file. If no

name is specified, no DipAngle field will be added to the
output file. If a field of this type exists in the StartPoint
file, it is copied to the output file.
DIPAZIFD
C*20
Name of the DipAzimuth field to add to the output file. If

no name is specified, no DipAzimuth field will be added
to the new file. If a field of this type exists in the input
startpoint file, that field is copied to the output file.
DISTFELD
C*20
Name of the Distance field to add to the output file. If no

name is specified, no Distance field will be added.
UPORDOW
N
C*4
Flow direction control.

Default Value = UP
Options:
SELECT
R2003.12.0
C*8
UP
= Flow Updip, toward larger Z values.
DOWN
= Flow Downdip, toward smaller Z values.
BOTH
= Flow both Updip and Downdip
Output point selection.

Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL
= Output all points in each trace.
INT+END
= Output all but the first point in each

trace.
The first point is the StartPoint, unless
UPORDOWN is BOTH.
END ONLY
= Output only the last point in each trace
BOTHENDS
= Output both first and last points in each

trace.
Process
10
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MODEL
C*8
DISTANCE
GENERAL
C*4
C*4
GENRTOLR R
REPORT
R2003.12.0
C*8

Grid interpolation surface model.
Default Value = BILINEAR
Options:
BILINEAR
= Use a bilinear surface determined by

the Z values at the corners of the grid
cell.
BICUBIC
= Use a smooth bicubic surface

determined by the 16 grid Z values
nearest the grid cell.
BIQUINTIC
= Use a smooth JJD biquintic surface

determined by the sixteen grid Z
values nearest the grid cell
Metric to measure distance along orthogonal contour

profiles.
Default Value = XY
Options:
XY
= Measure Euclidean distance in the XY plane.
XYZ
= Measure Euclidean distance in Three-space.
Generalize the output profile traces.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Generalize
NO
= Do not generalize
0.0 to Tolerance for line generalization of output traces.

Infinity Required if GENERAL = YES (the default). Ignored if
GENERAL = NO.
Default Value = 0.9999 * DISTSTEP
Generates a progress report at the level of detail you
specify.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE
= Report only errors
PARTIAL
= Report only totals at end
FULL
= Report on each profile track
Process
11
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
STARTXFD
Field number of the X field in the input startpoint file

Default Value = The first X field in the file.
STARTYFD
Field number of the Y field in the input startpoint file.

Default Value = The first Y field in the file
STOPXFLD
Field number of the X field in the input stopline file.

STOPYFLD
Field number of the Y field in the input stopline file.

Default Value = The first Y field in the file.
STOPZFLD
Field number of the Z field in the input stopline file.

Default Value = The first Z field in the file.
STOPIDFD
Field number of the SegID field in the input stopline file.

Default Value = The first SegID field in the file.
FALTXFLD
Field number of the X field in the input fault file.

FALTYFLD
Field number of the Y field in the input fault file.

Default Value = The first Y field in the file
FALTIDFD
Field number of the SegID field in the input fault file.

Default Value = The first SegID field in the file.
DISTSTEP
0 to
Length of each step.
Infinity Default Value = 1/3 of the grid increment
DISTJUMP
0.0 to Distance to jump when trying to jump out of a pit.

Infinity Default Value = 0.0
BIASANGL
-180.0 Angle to turn from true slope direction. Measured by

to 360.0degrees in a positive, clockwise direction
Default Value = 0.0
ZMINSTOP
Minimum Z value. If a trace goes below this level, stop

tracing.
Default Value = Zmin of the grid
ZMAXSTOP R
Maximum Z value. If a trace goes above this level, stop

tracing.
Default Value = Zmax of the grid
Process
12
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DZMINSTP
-Infinit Minimum delta Z value. If a trace goes above its

y to 0.0 startpoint Z value plus DZMAXSTP, stop tracing. This
value must be a negative real number.
Default Value = -(Grid Z range)
DZMAXSTP R
0.0 to Maximum delta-Z value. If a trace goes above its

Infinity startpoint X value pule DZMAXSTP, stop tracing.
Default Value = Z range of the grid.
DISTMAX
0.0 to Maximum distance to follow a flowline. Measured

Infinity according to parameter DISTANCE, q.v.
Default Value = 4 (Grid Diagonal)
DISTMIN
Minimum distance to follow a flowline. If the length of a

flowline profile is less than DISTMIN, it will not be
written to the output file. Measured according to
parameter DISTANCE, q.v.
Default Value = 1/1000 (Grid Diagonal)
SAMPLESP
0.0 to Interval to sample input lines on file STARTPNT to

Infinity generate evenly spaced startpoints. If zero, actual vertices
from file STARTPNT will be used as startpoints. If
positive, file STARTPNT must have a SegID field.
Default Value = 0.0
Process
13
Landmark
Overlay
Name
OVERLAY
Alternate Name
Function
This process allows the overlaying of one or more graphic segments

from an existing input picture onto another picture.
Notes

The FROMPICT pictures color table is used in this process. The
TOPICT picture must already exist.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FROMZGF
C*80
Name of the graphics file that contains FROMPICT.

Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process
FROMPICT
C*80
Name of the picture that is the source for all or some of

the copied graphic features.
Default Value = Current picture specified by the
PICTURE Process
TOZGF
C*80
Name of the graphics file that contains TOPICT.

PICTURE Process
TOPICT
C*80
Name of the output picture. This picture must exist.
DIVIDE
C*20
Method of handling the division of features from the input

picture.
Default Value = MAINTAIN DIVISIONS
Options:
SINGLE FEATURE
= Copy input features into one

feature on output picture
MAINTAIN
DIVISIONS
= Preserve feature distinction

during copy
Process
14
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CUTLINE
C*12
LGBTYPES

Drawing of a cutline around the map.
Default Value = NO CUTLINE
Options:
CUTLINE
= Draw a cutline
NO CUTLINE
= Do not draw cutline
1000 Array of up to 40 graphics feature types to copy.

One code is assigned to each feature type, unless all
available types are to copy, in which case set LGBTYPES
to a negative number. See Appendix A. Graphics Feature
Codes in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual for a list of
available graphics feature codes.
Default Value = Output all features
Range Options:
11000
0
<0
R2003.12.0
= Output that feature

= Ignore
= Output all features
Process
15
Landmark
Overpost Resolve
Name
OVERPOST RESOLVE
Alternate Name RESOLVE OVERPLOT

Function
This process eliminates label overplotting for all control points,

seismic shotpoints and seismic line names. In moving these labels, the
process tries not to put them on the map border, contour or lease labels.
Overplotting that cannot be resolved is placed on another picture or
optionally allowed to remain in an overplotted configuration.
Valid Combinations for Well or Control Point Labels

There are eight possible label placements for a label associated with a
control point or well symbol.
top-left
top-center
top-right
center-left
bottom-left
center-right
bottom-center
bottom-right
Well Symbol Label Positions
The default penalties associated with alternate label placements follow

the pattern shown below.
2
4
7
1
3
Default Penalty Weightings

The penalties are rotated so that the 0 penalty position corresponds to
the original placement of the label on the input map. For example, if
the original label placement was center-right, then 0 penalty points
would be charged if the label could take that position on the output
map; 1 penalty point would be charged for placing the label in the
down-right position; and 2 penalty points would be charged for placing
the label in the top-right position.
If the user specifies the well label placement penalties, the input label
position is always assumed as top-center. The user must mentally
rotate the penalty pattern to account for maps if the label does not
appear in that position on the input map.
R2003.12.0
Process
16
Landmark
Generally speaking, the penalty pattern in Default Penalty Weightings

favors label placements on the same side of a symbol. For example, if
the label was originally placed above its symbol, placement above, and
above and to the right of the symbol is favored over placement below,
and below and to the left.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FROMZGF
C*80

PICTURE Process
FROMPICT
C*80
Name of the picture that contains the overpost problems.

PICTURE Process
TOZGF
C*80
Name of the graphics file to contain TOPICT.

PICTURE Process
TOPICT
C*80
Name of the output picture to contain the corrected

overposts.
DELPICT
C*80
Name of the optimal output picture to contain labels

whose overposts could not be resolved and all other
graphic elements except the resolved overposts.
WELLOUT
C*24
Name of the data file to hold deleted well labels.

MFDWELL
SEISOUT
C*24
MFDSEIS
05
Number of the MFD to contain the deleted well label file.

Default Value = 1
Name of the optional data file to hold deleted shotpoint
labels.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the deleted shotpoint

labels file, SEISOUT.
Default Value = 1
Process
17
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
REPORT
C*20

Information to report.
Default Value = LABELS AND COUNTS
Options:
NONE
= No interim information
COUNTS
= Number of the iteration is printed
LABELS AND COUNTS
PRIWELLL
PRISILNL
14
Priority of the seismic line name labels relative to the

other 3 label types.
Default Value = 2
PRISISPL
14
Priority of the seismic shotpoint labels relative to the

other 3 label types.
Default Value = 3
PRIBAKGL
14
Priority of the background labels (well labels whose well

symbol is blank) relative to the other 3 label types.
Default Value = 4
DELWELLL
C*20
DELSILNL
R2003.12.0
= Full report on detected

overposts and label
placement optimization
efforts
C*20
Priority of the well labels relative to the other 3 label

types.
Default Value = 1
Deletion of well labels from the map to resolve an

overpost.
Default Value = DELETION ALLOWED
Options:
DELETION ALLOWED
= Delete well labels
DELETION
FORBIDDEN
= Do not delete well labels
Deletion of seismic line names from the map to resolve an

overpost.
Options:
DELETION ALLOWED
= Delete seismic line names
DELETION
FORBIDDEN
= Do not delete seismic line

names
Process
18
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DELSISPL
C*20
DELBAKGL

Deletion of seismic shotpoint labels from the map to
resolve an overpost.
Options:
C*20
DELETION
ALLOWED
= Deletes seismic shotpoint labels.
DELETION
FORBIDDEN
= Do not shotpoint labels.
Deletion of background labels from the map to resolve an

overpost.
Options:
DELETION ALLOWED = Delete background labels
DELETION
FORBIDDEN
R2003.12.0
= Do not delete background

labels
WGHTDSPL
08
Penalty weight for deletion of shotpoint label.

Default Value = 2
WGHTKSPL
08
Penalty weight for keeping original position of shotpoint

labels.
Default Value = 0
WGHTMSPL
08
Penalty weight for moving shotpoint label to opposite of

line.
Default Value = 1
WGHTDLWL
010
Penalty weight for deletion of well label.

Default Value = 8
WGHTTCWL
010
Penalty weight for top center position of well label.

Default Value = 0
WGHTBCWL
010
Penalty weight for bottom center position of well label.

Default Value = 5
WGHTLFWL
010
Penalty weight for left position of well label.

Default Value = 4
WGHTTLWL
010
Penalty weight for top left position of well label.

Default Value = 2
Process
19
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
WGHTBLWL
010
Penalty weight for bottom left position of well label.

Default Value = 7
WGHTRTWL
010
Penalty weight for right position of well label.

Default Value = 3
WGHTTRWL
010
Penalty weight for top right position of well label.

Default Value = 1
WGHTBRWL
010
Penalty weight for bottom right position of well label.

Default Value = 6
WGHTDLNL
04
Penalty weight for deletion of line name.

Default Value = 4
WGHTOLNL
04
Penalty weight for keeping original position of line name

label.
Default Value = 0
WGHT30CL
04
Penalty weight for 30 degree clockwise rotation of line

name label relative to line.
Default Value = 1
WGHT30CC
04
Penalty weight for 30 degree clockwise rotation of line

name label relative to line.
Default Value = 2
WGHTDLBG
04
Penalty weight for deletion of the background label (well

label whose well symbol is blank).
Default Value = 2
WGHTMOBG
04
Penalty weight for keeping the background label in its

original position.
Default Value = 0
WGHTDLCL
110
Weight factor for deletion of cultural label.

Default Value = 8
WGHTTCCL
110
Weight factor for top center position of cultural label.

Default Value = 0
WGHTBCCL
110
Weight factor for bottom center position of cultural label.

Default Value = 6
WGHTLFCL
110
Weight factor for left position of cultural label.

Default Value = 4
Process
20
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
WGHTTLCL
110
Weight factor for top left position of cultural label.

Default Value = 2
WGHTBLCL
110
Weight factor for bottom left position of cultural label.

Default Value = 7
WGHTRTCL
110
Weight factor for right position of cultural label.

Default Value = 3
WGHTTRCL
110
Weight factor for top right position of cultural label.

Default Value = 1
WGHTBRCL
110
Weight factor for bottom right position of cultural label.

Default Value = 5
UNMOVTGL C*20
MOVEDTGL
R2003.12.0
Drawing of well symbol tag lines for unmoved labels.

Default Value = TAG LINES DRAWN
Options:
C*20
TAG LINES DRAWN
= Draw tag lines
TAG LINES NOT DRAWN
= Do not draw tag lines
Drawing of well symbol tag lines for moved labels.

Default Value = TAG LINES DRAWN
Options:
TAG LINES DRAWN
= Draw tag lines
TAG LINES NOT DRAWN
= Do not draw tag lines
WELLSYMB
0100 New symbol code to use for all symbols whose labels
have been deleted.
Default Value = 0, use original symbol
SYMBCOLR
0255 New symbol color code to use for all symbols whose
labels have been deleted.
Default Value = 2
SZREDFAC
0.0
1.25
Factor to multiply box surrounding label by to change its

size before overpost detection.
This box is compared to other boxes to determine if the
labels overpost onto one another. Usually this number is
reduced in size allowing labels to overlay somewhat.
Default Value = 1.0
Process
21
Landmark
Patch Grid
Name
PATCH GRID
Alternate Name GRID PATCHING

Function
This process cuts data from the patch grid and pastes it onto the output
grid as replacement data.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
PATCH
MFDPATCH
FAULTS
MFDFAULT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
C*24
I
Name of the input patch grid.

05
C*24
I
GRIDIN
C*24
MFDIN
Number of the MFD that contains the input patch grid.

Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file for the patch grid.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the input grid to patch.
05

Default Value = 0
GRIDOUT
C*24
Name of the output grid file.

Default Value = Based upon the input grid file name.
MFDOUT
FLTXFLD
Field number of the x field in the fault file.

Default Value = First X field
FLTYFLD
Field number of the y field in the fault file.

Default Value = First Y field
FLTIDFLD
Field number of the Segment ID field in the fault file.

Default Value = First Seg ID field
ZNON
Null data value for the output grid file.

Default Value = ZNON of the z field being gridded
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.

Default Value = 1
Process
22
Landmark
Picture
Name
PICTURE
Alternate Name PICT

Function
This process opens a graphics file and picture ready to receive

graphics. If the map is projected, the PROJECTION setup commands
must be executed before the picture is opened. The Latitude and
Longitude parameters are required for projected maps and ignored
otherwise.
Valid Combinations for Parameter SCALTYPE
Table 1:
SCALTYPE
Related
Parameters
ABSOLUTE
UNITSPERINC
H
MAPTOGROUN
D
Req
Req
XSCALE
Req
YSCALE
Req
DATUNITS*
Req
Req
MAPUNITS
Req
GRDUNITS
Req
ABSSCALE
* Not required if using a projection with a defined data unit, such as UTM (meters).
Parameters for graphics file & picture

Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZGFNAME
C*80
Name of the graphics file to contain or that contains the

picture to open.
This picture receives information from or can be
displayed by other ZCL processes.
HEADER
C*80
Header text for the graphics file. Used if the graphics file
is new.
C*3
Whether the graphics file is old or new.

Options:
NEWZGF
R2003.12.0
NEW
= New Graphics File
OLD
= Old Graphics File
Process
23
Landmark
Parameter
Name
PICTURE
NEWPICT
PICTYPE
Data
Type
C*80
Name of the picture file to open or create.
C*3
Whether the picture is old or new.

Default Value = NEW
Options:
C*16
NEW
= New picture
OLD
= Old picture
Type of picture to create. Used if NEWPICT = NEW.

Default Value = BASEMAP
Options:
BASEMAP
= Basemap plot
CROSS-SECTION = Cross-section plot
Parameters for AOI Source

AOISRCE
R2003.12.0
C*8
Source for new picture AOI. Used if NEWPICT = NEW.

Default Value = USER
Options:
GRID
= Grid file
DATA
= Data file
PICTURE
= Another existing picture
USER
= User specifies through prescribed series of

parameters
CONTOUR
= Contour file
AOIFILE
C*24
Name of the file whose AOI defines the AOI of a new

picture. Required if AOISRCE = GRID or DATA.
MFDIN
AOIZGF
C*80
Graphics file that contains the picture whose AOI defines

the AOI of a new picture. Required if AOISRCE =
PICTURE.
AOIPICT
C*80
Picture whose AOI defines the AOI of a new picture.

Required if AOISRCE = PICTURE.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the file whose AOI

defines the AOI of a new picture. Used if AOISRCE =
GRID or DATA.
Default Value = 0
Process
24
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
AOITYPE
C*20

Coordinates used to define the corners of the picture.
Note: The PROJECTION Process must be used to set up
a projection before this process is used if
AOITYPE XY
Default Value = XY
Options:
XY
= Rectilinear (northing/easting)
corner coordinates.
XYPROJECTED
= Rectilinear (northing/easting)
corner coordinates; the picture has
rectilinear edges.
LATLONGPROJECTED
= Latitude/Longitude corner
coordinates; the picture has
Latitude/Longitude edges.
DLS/NTS PROJECTED
= Dominion Land Survey (DLS) or
National Topographic Survey
(NTS) of Canada corner
coordinates; the picture has
Latitude/Longitude edges
corresponding to the township,
range, and section values supplied
for picture corners.
Parameters if AOISRCE = USER & AOITYPE = XY or XYPROJECTED
XMIN
R2003.12.0
Minimum x coordinate in data (engineering) units.

Required if AOITYPE = XY or XYPROJECTED,
NEWPICT = NEW, and AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum x coordinate based on the
AOISRCE parameters
Process
25
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
XMAX
Maximum x coordinate in data (engineering) units.

Default Value = Maximum x coordinate based on the
AOISRCE parameters
YMIN
Minimum y coordinate in data (engineering) units.

Default Value = Minimum y coordinate based on the
AOISRCE parameters
YMAX
Maximum y coordinate in data (engineering) units.

Default Value = Maximum y coordinate based on the
AOISRCE parameters
Parameters used if AOISRCE = USER & AOITYPE = LATLONGPROJECTED

MNLONDEG
180
Longitude minimum, in degrees. Used if AOITYPE =
through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and
MNLONMIN
180
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum longitude degrees defined by
the AOISRCE parameters
59
Longitude minimum, in minutes. Used if AOITYPE =
MNLONSEC
59
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum longitude minutes defined by
59
Longitude minimum, in seconds. Used if AOITYPE =
MXLONDEG
59
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = 0
180
Longitude maximum, in degrees. Used if AOITYPE =
180
R2003.12.0
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum longitude degrees defined by
Process
26
Landmark
Parameter
Name
MXLONMIN
Data
Type
I

59
Longitude maximum, in minutes. Used if AOITYPE =
MXLONSEC
59
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum longitude defined by the
AOISRCE parameters
59
Longitude maximum, in seconds. Used if AOITYPE =
MNLATDEG
59
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = 0
90
Latitude minimum, in degrees. Used if AOITYPE =
MNLATMIN
90
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum latitude degrees defined by the
AOISRCE parameters
59
Latitude minimum, in minutes. Used if AOITYPE =
MNLATSEC
59
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum latitude minutes defined by the
AOISRCE parameters
59
Latitude minimum, in seconds. Used if AOITYPE =
MXLATDEG
59
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = 0
90
Latitude maximum, in degrees. Used if AOITYPE =
MXLATMIN
90
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum latitude degrees defined by
59
Latitude maximum, in minutes. Used if AOITYPE =
MXLATSEC
59
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum latitude minutes defined by
59
Latitude maximum, in seconds. Used if AOITYPE =
59
R2003.12.0
AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = 0
Process
27
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for map dimensions
R2003.12.0
XLENGTH
Plots size in the x direction, in plotter units (in or cm).

Can be used instead of specifying an x scale.
Recommended for use if PICTYPE = Z-3D, FENCE or
BLOCK.
Default Value = If no projection is active, and if XSCALE
is supplied, then (XLMARGIN +
XRMARGIN) +
(XMAX XMIN)/XSCALE
or
If no projection is active and if XSCALE is not
supplied, then 30 in or 76.5 cm
YLENGTH
Plot size in the y direction, in plotter units (in or cm). Can

be used instead of specifying a y scale. Recommended for
use if PICTYPE = Z-3D, FENCE or BLOCK.
Default Value = If no projection is active, and if YSCALE
is supplied, then (YLMARGIN +
YRMARGIN) +
(YMAX YMIN)/YSCALE
or
If no projection is active, and if YSCALE is not
supplied, then 30 in or 76.5 cm
XLMARGIN
Plot margin to the left of the map, in plotter units (in or

cm).
XRMARGIN
YBMARGIN
Plot margin to the right of the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Plot margin below the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
YTMARGIN
Plot margin above the map, in plotter units (in or cm).

Process
28
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for scaling

SCALTYPE
ABSSCALE
R2003.12.0
Type of scale used for a new picture. SCALTYPE can

only be used if the AOISRCE parameter is set to USER.
See Valid Combinations on page 23 for required
parameters using different scale types.
Options:
MAPTOGROUND
= Scaling based on ground units

per map unit. This type of
scaling implies that your data
units and AOI are in meters, but
the scale of the map is given as
1" = 1000'. So the associated
input parameters would be:
ABSOLUTE
= Scaling based on number of data

units per map unit, expressed in
the same units. (A dimensionless
number.)
UNITSPERINCH
= Scaling based on the number of

data units per plotter unit (in or
cm) on plotted picture. (Data
units per cm if UNITS =
METRIC using SYSTEM
PARMS Process.)
DATUNITS
= METERS,
data units
MAPUNITS
= INCHES,
map units
GRDUNITS
= FEET,
ground units
ABSSCALE
= 1000.0, relative
scale factor
Scaling factor. It is an absolute scale if SCALTYPE =

ABSOLUTE.
Absolute scale is the ratio of a distance on the map to the
corresponding distance on the surface of the earth
measured in the same units. It is dimensionless. For
example, an absolute scale of 1000 means 1:1000 and can
be 1" = 1000" or 1cm = 1000cm, etc.
Process
29
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MAPGRND

Scaling factor. It is a relative scale if SCALTYPE =
MAPTOGROUND.
This relative scale is the ratio of a distance on the map and
the corresponding distance on the surface of the earth
measured in different units. For example, a relative scale
of 1000 could mean 1" = 1000mi or 1cm = 1000'm. The
left side of the equation is in map units (MAPUNITS) and
the right side is in ground units (GRDUNITS).
Default Value = 10,000
XSCALE
Map scale for the x direction. Number of data units per

inch on the map used if SCALTYPE = UNITSPERINCH.
Default Value = (XMAX XMIN)/ (XLENGTH
(XLMARGIN + XRMARGIN))
YSCALE
Map scale for the y direction. Number of data units per

inch on the map used if SCALTYPE = UNITSPERINCH.
Default Value = (YMAX YMIN)/ (YLENGTH
(YLMARGIN + YRMARGIN))
C*16
Data (engineering) units of the data to plot on the map is

specified in these units. Used if SCALTYPE =
ABSOLUTE or MAPTOGROUND.
Default Value = METERS
Options:
DATUNITS
INCHES
FEET
YARDS
NAUTICAL MILES
STATUTE MILES
MILLIMETERS
CENTIMETERS
METERS
KILOMETERS
US SURVEY FEET
R2003.12.0
Process
30
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MAPUNITS
C*16
Type of units used to define a picture. Used if

SCALTYPE = MAPTOGROUND. Map unit of measure,
as opposed to ground unit of measure. See SCALTYPE
on page 29.
Default Value = INCHES
Options:
Same as DATUNITS
GRDUNITS
C*16
Engineering units to use for plotting the data. Used if

SCALTYPE = MAPTOGROUND. The number of
ground units (GRDUNITS) per 1 map unit (MAPUNITS)
is relative to the map scale (ABSCALE).
Default Value = INCHES
Options:
Same as DATUNITS
Parameters used if AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED

CORNERS
SURVEY
C*4
C*4
NWCORNER C*4
R2003.12.0
Corners used to define the AOI. Used if AOITYPE =

DLS/NTS PROJECTED.
Default Value = NWSE
Options:
NWSE
= North West and South East corners
NESW
= North East and South West corners
NTS survey type. Used if NWCORNER, NECORNER,

SWCORNER, or SECORNER = NTS.
Default Value = NTS
Options:
NTS
= True National Topographic Survey corners
PNGA
= Petroleum & Natural Gas Act corners
System for specifying the North West corner if AOITYPE

= DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NWSE.
Default Value = DLS
Options:
DLS
= Dominion Land Survey
NTS
= National Topographic Survey
Process
31
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SECORNER
C*4
System for specifying the South East corner if AOITYPE

Default Value = DLS
Options:
Same as NWCORNER
NECORNER C*4
System for specifying the North East corner if AOITYPE

Default Value = DLS
Options:
Same as NWCORNER
SWCORNER C*4
System for specifying the South West corner if AOITYPE

Default Value = DLS
Options:
Same as NWCORNER
NWMERIDN
16
Meridian number for North West corner. Required if

AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.
NWRANGE
130
Range value for North West corner. Required if

NWTWNSHP
NWSCTION
1126 Township row value for NW corner. Required if

136 Section value for NW corner. Required if AOITYPE =
DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS = NWSE and
NWCORNER = DLS.
SEMERIDN
16
Meridian number for South East corner. Required if

SERANGE
130
Range value for South East corner. Required if AOITYPE

= DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS = NWSE and
NWCORNER = DLS.
SETWNSHP
1126 Township row value for SE corner. Required if

SESCTION
136
Section value for South East corner. Required if

Process
32
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
NEMERIDN
16
Meridian number for North East corner. Required if

AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS =
NESW and NECORNER = DLS.
NERANGE
130
Range value for North East corner. Required if AOITYPE

= DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NESW and
NECORNER = DLS.
NETWNSHP
1126 Township row number for North East corner. Required if

NESCTION
136
Section value for North East corner. Required if

SWMERIDN
16
Meridian number for South West corner. Required if

NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.
SWRANGE
130
Range value for South West corner. Required if

SWTWNSHP
1126 Township row number for South West corner. Required if

SWSCTION
136
Section value for South West corner. Required if

NWNTS
C*32
String describing North West corner in terms of the NTS

system. Required if AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED
and CORNERS = NWSE and NWCORNER = NTS.
SENTS
C*32
String describing South East corner in terms of the NTS

and CORNERS = NWSE and SECORNER = NTS.
NENTS
C*32
String describing North East corner in terms of the NTS

and CORNERS = NESW and NECORNER = NTS.
SWNTS
C*32
String describing South West corner in terms of the NTS

and CORNERS = NESW and SWCORNER = NTS.
Process
33
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters used if PICTYPE = CROSS-SECTION
GRIDIN
MFDGRD
LINEIN
R2003.12.0
C*24
Array of up to 10 input grids to use for computing the

AOI for a new cross-section picture. Required if
PICTYPE = CROSS-SECTION.
05
C*24
MFDLINE
LINENUM
Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs that contains the

input grids, listed in the same position as in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input vertex file that contains the
cross-section baseline. Required if PICTYPE =
CROSS-SECTION.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the baseline vertex file.

Default Value = 0
Line number in the baseline vertex file to use for
cross-section display.
Default Value = 1.0
Process
34
Landmark
Picture Assembly
Name
PICTURE ASSEMBLY
Alternate Name ASSM

Function
This process assembles or overlays one input picture onto an output

picture. The Area of Interests (AOIs) and scales of input and output
pictures need not match.
This process is useful for generating index maps and side-by-side
pictures.
Notes
The TOPICT pictures color table is used in this process.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FROMZGF
C*80

PICTURE Process
FROMPICT
C*80
Name of the picture to use as the source for all or some of

the copied features.
TOZGF
C*80
Name of the graphics file that contains TOPICT.

PICTURE Process
TOPICT
C*80
Name of the output picture.

PICTURE Process
DIVIDE
C*20
Method of handling the division of graphics features from

the input picture.
Default Value = MAINTAIN DIVISIONS
Options:
SINGLE FEATURE
= Copy input features into one

feature on output picture
MAINTAIN
DIVISIONS
= Preserve feature distinction

during copy
Process
35
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CUTLINE
C*12
Drawing of a cutline around the map.

Default Value = NO CUTLINE
Options:
CUTLINE
= Draw a cutline
NO CUTLINE
= Do not draw cutline
XLOWLEFT
The x position on output picture for the placement of the

lower left corner of input picture, in plotter units (in or
cm).
YLOWLEFT
The y position on output picture for the placement of the

lower left corner of input picture, in plotter units (in or
cm).
SCALE
Scale factor to apply to input picture. Required if

HEIGHT is not supplied.
HEIGHT
Height of copy of input picture on output picture, in

plotter units (in or cm). Required if SCALE is not
supplied.
LGBTYPES
R2003.12.0
0
1000
Array of up to 40 graphics feature types to copy.

One code is assigned to each feature type, unless all
available types are to copy, in which case set LGBTYPES
to zero. See Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes in the
Z-MAP Plus Reference manual for a complete list of
available graphics feature codes.
Default Value = 0, output all features
Range Options:
11000
= Output that feature
= Output all features
Process
36
Landmark
Picture Stats
Name
PICTURE STATS
Alternate Name PIC STATS

Function
This process gathers and displays statistics on a picture.
Example
ZCL can be instructed to write the same file statistics into ZCL Data
Blocks so that other processes have access to this information by
creating three Data Blocks with the ZCL DATA BLOCK process. One
DATA BLOCK must contain 22 Integer locations, the second must
contain 29 Real locations and the third must contain 4 Double
Precision locations. The following is an example of how this is done in
a ZCL command stream:
DATA BLOCK:10,00
C
DATA BLOCK:20,00
C
DATA BLOCK:30,00
C
PICTURE STATS:
R2003.12.0
HOWMANY = 22,
DATATYPE = INTEGER,
DATASIZE = 1
HOWMANY = 29,
DATATYPE = REAL,
DATASIZE = 1
HOWMANY = 4,
DATATYPE = REAL,
DATASIZE = 2
ZGFNAME
PICTURE
DBINTG
DBREAL
DBDBLE
=
=
=
=
=
Z-MAP.ZGF,
WELL BASEMAP,
10,
20,
30
/
Process
37
Landmark
By specifying DBINTG = 10, DBREAL = 20 and DBDBLE = 30 in

the PICTURE STATS process, the user has specified that DATA
BLOCK 10, DATA BLOCK 20 and DATA BLOCK 30 are filled in
the following manner:
For DATA BLOCK 10
Table 2:
Location Information Present
Border type
1
Projection flag
2
Absolute scale
3
UTM reference code
4
Projection code
5
Reference spheroid code
6
Projected units code
7
Minimum longitude, in degrees
8
Minimum longitude, in minutes
9
Minimum longitude, in seconds
10
Maximum longitude, in degrees
11
Maximum longitude, in minutes
12
Maximum longitude, in seconds
13
Minimum latitude, in degrees
14
Minimum latitude, in minutes
15
Minimum latitude, in seconds
16
Maximum latitude, in degrees
17
Maximum latitude, in minutes
18
Maximum latitude, in seconds
19
Hemisphere code
20
Dateline code
21
Spherical radius calculation method
22
R2003.12.0
Process
38
Landmark
For DATA BLOCK 20
Table 3:
Minimum x value
1
Maximum x value
2
Range of x
3
Map scale, in x direction
4
AOI length, in x direction
5
Left border width
6
Right border width
7
Whole plot length, in x direction
8
Minimum y value
9
Maximum y value
10
Range of y
11
Map scale, in y direction
12
AOI length, in y direction
13
Bottom border width
14
Top border width
15
Whole plot length, in y direction
16
Least standard parallel
17
Greatest standard parallel
18
Reference latitude
19
Scale factor for reference longitude
20
Reference longitude
21
Scale factor for reference longitude
22
False northing
23
False easting
24
Projection coordinates units factor
25
Semi-major axis
26
Semi-minor axis
27
Azimuth of central line (Oblique Mercator projection)
28
Scale factor at origin (Oblique Mercator projection)
29
For DATA BLOCK 30
Table 4:
Minimum x value
1
Maximum x value
2
Minimum y value
3
Maximum y value
4
R2003.12.0
Process
39
Landmark
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZGFNAME
C*80
Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to

query. The graphics file must already exist.
PICTURE
C*80
Name of the picture to obtain statistics for. The picture

must already exist on the graphics file defined by
ZGFNAME.
DBINTG
Number of the output integer DATA BLOCK.

The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is
non-zero and the specified DATA BLOCK exists and is
of type INTEGER. The DATA BLOCK must contain at
least 21 locations.
Default Value = 0
DBREAL
Number of the output real DATA BLOCK.

nonzero and the specified DATA BLOCK exists and is of
type REAL. The DATA BLOCK must contain at least 29
locations.
Default Value = 0
DBDBLE
Number of the output double precision DATA BLOCK.

nonzero and the specified DATA BLOCK exists, is of
type REAL, and DATASIZE = 2. The DATA BLOCK
must contain at least 4 locations.
Default Value = 0
Process
40
Landmark
Point Gridding
Name
POINT GRIDDING
Alternate Name P GRD

Function
This process calculates a grid from a set of control points. A previously

built grid (control grid) and/or fault file can be used to control the
gridding process.
Control is allowed for:
selecting from a variety of gridding algorithms and post grid

processing algorithms
specifying the grid interval for the Area of Interest (AOI)
controlling which data are used when calculating a node value
specifying whether to use data beyond the Area of Interest
(AOI)
Parameters
Parameter
Name
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
INFLD
FAULTS
MFDFAULT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type

Name of the input control point file.
05
Field number of the control point field in the input control

point file.
Default Value = First Z Value field
C*24
I
GRIDOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
Number of the MFD that contains the input control point

file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file.

05

Default Value = 0
05

Default Value = 1
Process
41
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
METHOD
C*16

Gridding method.
Default Value = LEAST SQUARES
Options:
LEAST SQUARES
= Moving least squares
PROJECTED SLOPES
= Projected slopes
WEIGHTED
AVERAGE
= Moving weighted averages
CLOSEST POINT
= Closest point
DISTANCE
= Distance to closest point
ISOPACH
= Isopach
BOUNDED RANGE
= Bounded range
LINEAR TREND
= Moving linear trend
MOVING PLATE
= Moving plate model
BLIMIT
Boundary tolerance.
Any point that falls in the z value bounded range and is
also in BLIMIT of one of the boundaries is treated as if it
were at that boundary. Used if METHOD = BOUNDED
RANGE.
Default Value = 0.0
COMPRESS
Proximity of boundary contour (the zero contour in the

case of isopach gridding) to data points with boundary
values as opposed to those inside the bounded range.
Used if METHOD = ISOPACH or BOUNDED RANGE.
The smaller the value, the closer the contour is to the data
points with boundary values. A value of 0.0 causes the
contour to pass through them. A value of 2.0 causes the
contour to fall approximately halfway between the data
points.
Default Value = 2.0
Process
42
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DATATYPE C*8

Whether the input data has gradient information with each
data point. Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
Default Value = NORMAL
Options:
NORMAL
= Data does not contain gradient

information (X, Y, Z)
EXPANDED
= Data contains gradient information and

weights (X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, W)
XMIN
Minimum x coordinate of the grid area.

Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum x value of the data
XMAX
YMIN
Maximum x coordinate of the grid area.

the actual maximum x value of the data
Minimum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum y value of the data
YMAX
Maximum y coordinate of the grid area.

the actual maximum y value of the data
XINC
Gridding interval of x after refinement occurs.

Default Value = Round number based on:
( XMAX XMIN ) ( YMAX YMIN )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------number of points
R2003.12.0
YINC
Increment of y of the grid to create.

Default Value = XINC
ZMIN
Minimum z value of the grid (a lower limit for allowable

surface values). Used as the lower bound if METHOD =
BOUNDED RANGE.
Default Value = If CONGRID is specified, ZMIN of
CONGRID
or
If CONGRID is not specified, the minimum
data z value minus 10% of the range in data z
values
Process
43
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZMAX
Maximum z value of the grid (upper limit for allowable

surface values). Used as the upper bound if METHOD =
ISOPACH or BOUNDED RANGE.
Default Value = If CONGRID is specified, ZMAX of
CONGRID
or
If CONGRID is not specified, the maximum
data z value plus 10% of the range in data z
values
REACH
Data collection radius for line endpoints and control

points if a control point file is specified. Points beyond
this distance are not used to calculate the value of the
node.
Default Value = 1 2 * grid diagonal
CONTROL
C*16
Type of control grid. Used if CONGRID is specified.

Default Value = DEFAULT AOI
Options:
PASS
= Pass control grid directly to post grid

logic.
BLANK
= Blank control grid along fault traces.
DEFAULT
AOI
= Default AOI parameters to those of the

control grid.
GRID
ZNONS
= Grid at nodes where control z value is

ZNON. Pass other z values through.
GRID
NON-ZNONS
= Grid at nodes where control z value

is not ZNON.
REGRID FAULTS = Regrid along faults in a control

grid.
R2003.12.0
XEXPAND
Distance in x beyond the AOI from which data can be

used. Specified in engineering units.
Default Value = 0.0
YEXPAND
Distance in y beyond the AOI from which data can be

Default Value = 0.0
Process
44
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
WEIGHT
C*8
Type of weighting function for grid initialization.

Default Value = SHARP
Options:
SHARP
= This gives very large weights to close data.

This type of weighting should be used
unless you are dealing with very rough
(noisy) data.
SMOOTH
= This produces a smooth grid from rough or

noisy data. However, the results do not
necessarily honor the data.
MINPTS
18
Minimum total number of points in area around a grid

node used to compute a grid value.
Default Value = 1
PERSECT
18
Maximum number of points per octant used to compute a

grid value.
Default Value = 4
MINSECT
18
Minimum number of octants in the collection circle that

are required to contain at least one data point in order to
compute a grid value.
Default Value = 1
FORCE
FLEXTYPE
R2003.12.0
C*12
Distance to extrapolate grid values beyond the data.

Values are always calculated up to this distance and can
be calculated even further.
Default Value = 0.5 * grid diagonal
Type of grid flexing algorithm.
Default Value = BIHARMONIC
Options:
BIHARMONIC
= Biharmonic flexing
LAPLACIAN
= Laplacian flexing
COMBINATION
= Combination of Biharmonic and

Laplacian
NONE
= No flexing is desired
Process
45
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
CUTOFF
Termination criterion for grid flexing.

This is the maximum normalized rate of change of the
overall surface smoothness from one flexing pass to the
next. Flexing terminates if the change is less than
CUTOFF, and NUMPASS is greater than 0.
Default Value = 0.25
REFINE
Number of times to refine the grid between passes of the

flexing filter; used only if FLEXTYPE is not equal to
NONE.
Each refinement halves the grid increments and
interpolates intermediate grid values. The order of
refining is flex, refine, flex, refine, . . ., flex.
Default Value = 0, if fault file or METHOD = CLOSEST
POINT
or
1, otherwise
NUMPASS
Maximum number of flexing passes.

If the number is negative, then ABS (NUMPASS) flexing
passes are performed regardless of the value of CUTOFF.
If the number is positive, then NUMPASS is the upper
limit on the number of flexing passes.
Default Value = 10
FLEXCTRL
C*16
Termination method for flexing.

Default Value = FLEX<=NUMPASS
Options:
FLEX=NUMPASS
= Causes flexing to occur

NUMPASS times without
regard to CUTOFF.
FLEX<=NUMPASS
= Causes flexing to occur a

maximum of NUMPASS
times. A grid curvature change
of less than CUTOFF
terminates flexing.
Process
46
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SMOOTH
CONGRID
C*24
MFDGRID
REPORT
R2003.12.0
C*8

0.0
1.0
Smoothing modulus for flexing; there is a trade-off

between smoothing and honoring the data.
A value of 0 results in a strict fit to the original grid,
without concern for smoothness. A value of 1 produces
the smoothest grid, without concern for a precise fit to the
original grid.
Default Value = 0.2
Name of the input control grid.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the control grid.

Default Value = 0
Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Options:
NONE
= No report
PARTIAL
= Summary report
FULL
= Full report
DXFLD
Field number of the DZ/DX field in the control point file.

Used if DATATYPE = EXPANDED.
Default Value = First DZ/DX field
DYFLD
Field number of the DZ/DY field in the control point file.

Default Value = First DZ/DY field
WGTFLD
Field number for the Weight field in the control point file.
Process
47
Landmark
Point Grid Plus

Name
POINT GRID PLUS
Alternate Name THROW GRIDDING

Function
This process performs a more powerful version of point gridding.

Unlike the POINT GRIDDING Process, POINT GRID PLUS can
recognize and use optional throw, dip, and heave information provided
with faults.
Point Grid Plus can be used without faults, or with faults in the
standard X, Y, SEG ID format familiar to most users. In this case, the
module performs very similarly to Point Gridding. If used in this way,
the correct output grid file is GRIDOUT.
Input fault files should consist of single center line fault traces; these
traces can be expanded into fault polygons by this module. Control
points on one side of a fault trace can be used to initialize a grid node
on the other side of the trace after the z value of the control point is
adjusted for the fault throw.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
CONGRID
C*24
MFDCON
FAULTS
C*24
MFDFAULT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type

Name of the control point data file to grid. It is optional if
CONTROL = FLEX ONLY; it is ignored if CONTROL =
FAULTS ONLY; otherwise it is required.
05

file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input control grid.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the control grid.

Default Value = 0
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input center line

fault file.
Default Value = 0
Process
48
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FLTPOLY
C*24
MFDPOLY
GRIDOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
INTFTOUT
C*24
MFDINTFT

Name of input pre-computed fault polygon file for fault
face blanking and creation of fault face filled grid, to use
in place of program computed fault polygon file.
Note: Only one of the two parameters EXPFTOUT or
FLTPOLY can be nonblank during a single run.
05
Name of the output grid. This grid ties to the center line
fault traces.
05
R2003.12.0
EXPFTOUT
C*24
Number of the MFD that contains the output grid that

matches the center line fault traces.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output center line fault file, which has had
any ZNONs in the throw and/or dip angle fields replaced
by linearly interpolated values.
In order to output this file, the input fault file must have a
throw and/or dip angle field.
05
BLKGROUT C*24
MFDBLKGR
Number of the MFD that contains the input fault polygon

file.
Default Value = 0
Number of the MFD to contain the output center line fault

file with any ZNONs replaced in the throw and/or dip
angle fields.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output grid that has been modified so that the
surface is blanked inside the expanded fault zones.
In order to output this file, the input center line fault file
must contain both a throw and a dip angle field.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output grid that is

blanked inside the expanded fault zone.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output expanded fault file. In order to output
this file, the input center line fault file must contain both a
throw and a dip angle field.
Note: Only one of the two parameters EXPFTOUT or
FLTPOLY can be nonblank during a single run.
Process
49
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
MFDEXPFT
05
Number of the MFD to contain the expanded fault file.

Default Value = 1
Name of the output grid that has been modified so that the
surface inside the expanded fault zone is defined
according to the throw and dip information.
In order to output this file, the center line fault file must
contain both a throw and a dip angle field.
FILGROUT
C*24
MFDFILGR
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output grid with a

defined surface inside the expanded fault zone.
Default Value = 1
PROFOUT
C*24
MFDPROF
DATAOUT
C*24
MFDDATA
DATXFLD
Field number of the x field in the control point file.

Default Value = First X field in the file
DATYFLD
Field number of the y field in the control point file.

Default Value = First Y field in the file
DATZFLD
Field number of the z field in the control point file.

Default Value = First Z Value field in the file
Name of the output data file that contains profiles along

the expanded fault traces.
In order to output this file, the center line fault file must
contain both a throw and a dip angle field.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output profile data file.

Default Value = 1
Name of the output data file to contain the data actually
used to create the grid. The content varies depending on
the type of gridding.
For example, in isopach gridding data points in input data
file with zero (0) value appear in output data file with
program computed negative values. In projected slope
gridding, output data file includes calculated fields
holding DZ/DX and DZ/DY. In all cases, input data
points with null values and data points too far outside the
extrapolated grid AOI are eliminated.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output grid data file.

Default Value = 1
Process
50
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
DATDXFLD

Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
To use this field, set DATATYPE = EXPANDED,
otherwise the gradient information is calculated based
solely upon the x,y,z information in the control point file.
Default Value = First DZ/DX field in the file
DATDYFLD

Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
To use this field, set DATATYPE = EXPANDED;
otherwise the gradient information is calculated based
solely upon the x,y,z information in the control point file.
Default Value = First DZ/DY field in the file
DATWTFLD
Field number of the Gradient Weight field in the control

point file. Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
To use this field, set DATATYPE = EXPANDED.
The values in this field must lie between 0.0 and 1.0. If it
is equal to 1.0 for a control point, then the gradient used
for that control point is the one taken from the file. If it is
equal to 0.0, then the gradient used is calculated by the
Projected Slopes pre-processor.
Default Value = First Gradient Weight field in the file
FLTXFLD
Field number of the x field in the input center line fault

file.
FLTYFLD
Field number of the y field in the input center line fault

file.
FLTIDFLD
Field number of the Segment ID field in the center line

fault file.
FLTTFLD
Field number of the computed Throw field in the input

center line fault file. There need not be a throw field in the
center line fault file.
Note: If there is a throw and a heave field on the file, then
the heave field is used.
Default Value = First Throw field
Process
51
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FLTAFLD
Field number of the computed Dip Angle field in the

input center line fault file. There need not be a dip angle
field in the center line fault file.
Default Value = First Dip Angle field
FLTHFLD
Field number for Heave field in fault file.

Note: If there is a throw and heave field on the file, then
the heave field is used.
Default Value = First Heave field
METHOD
C*16
Gridding method.
Default Value = LEAST SQUARES
Options:
LEAST SQUARES
= Moving least squares
PROJECTED SLOPES
= Projected slopes
WEIGHTED
AVERAGE
= Moving weighted averages
CLOSEST POINT
= Closest point
DISTANCE
= Distance to closest point
RANDOM CLOSE PNT = Randomized closest point
R2003.12.0
ISOPACH
= Isopach
BOUNDED RANGE
= Bounded range
POINT DENSITY
= Point density
KRIGING
= Kriging
Process
52
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CONTROL
C*16

Type of control grid. Default grid AOI and grid
increments for the output grid are set to those of the
control grid used.
If CONTROL=DEFAULT AOI, the parameters REACH,
XEXPAND and YEXPAND are also defaulted to those of
the control grid.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE
= No control grid used.
FLEX ONLY
= Flex control grid using specified input

control points and faults as constraints
FAULTS
ONLY
= Process the input center line fault file

against the control grid to create the
specified output faults and/or profile
files; no input control point data is
required.
DEFAULT AOI = Default the output grid AOI, grid

increments, XEXPAND, YEXPAND,
REACH, and EXTRAP to those of the
control grid.
GRID ZNONS
= Any ZNON grid nodes in the control

grid are replaced by values determined
using:
specified gridding parameters
input control points
faults
No non-ZNON grid nodes are altered.
GRID NON-ZNONS = Any non-ZNON grid nodes in the

control grid are replaced by
values determined using:
specified gridding parameters
input control points
faults
No ZNON grid nodes are altered
XMIN
R2003.12.0
Minimum x coordinate of the grids to create.

Default Value = XMIN of the control grid if one is
provided
or
Computed from input data
Process
53
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
XMAX
Maximum x coordinate of the grids to create.

Default Value = XMAX of the control grid if one is
provided
or
YMIN
Minimum y coordinate of the grids to create.

Default Value = YMIN of the control grid if one is
provided
or
YMAX
Maximum y coordinate of the grids to create.

Default Value = YMAX of the control grid if one is
provided
or
XINC
Grid increment in the x direction for the grids to create.

Default Value = XINC of the control grid if one is
provided
or
YINC
Grid increment in the y direction for the grids to create.

Default Value = YINC of the control grid if one is
provided,
or
XINC, otherwise, which is computed from the
input data
REACH
Radius of the data collection circle.

Default Value = 1 2 * grid diagonal
ZMIN
Minimum z value for the grids to create.

Default Value = Minimum z of the control points minus
10% of their range
ZMAX
Maximum z value for the grids to create.

Default Value = Maximum z of the control points plus
10% of their range
UPZBND
Upper bound in z of the bounded range. Used if

METHOD = BOUNDED RANGE.
Default Value = 1.0
Process
54
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LOWZBND
Lower bound in z of the bounded range. Used if

METHOD = BOUNDED RANGE.
Default Value = 0.0
BLIMIT
Boundary tolerance.
Any point that falls in the z value bounded range and is
also in BLIMIT of one of the boundaries is treated as if it
were at that boundary. Used if METHOD = BOUNDED
RANGE.
Default Value = 0.0
XEXPAND
Distance in x beyond the AOI from which data can be

Default Value = 0.0
YEXPAND
Distance in y beyond the AOI from which data can be

Default Value = 0.0
DATATYPE C*8
MAXCROSS
R2003.12.0
Whether the input data has gradient information with each

data point. Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
Options:
NORMAL
= Data does not contain gradient

information
(X, Y, Z)
EXPANDED
= Data contains gradient information and

weights (X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, W)
Maximum allowed number of faults that cross the line

drawn between a data point and a grid node in order for
that data point to use in calculating a value at that grid
node.
Default Value = 2
Process
55
Landmark
Parameter
Name
COMPRESS
WEIGHT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
How close the boundary contour (the zero contour in the

case of isopach gridding) lies to data points with
boundary values as opposed to those inside the bounded
range. Used if METHOD = ISOPACH or BOUNDED
RANGE.
The smaller the value, the closer the contour is to the data
points with boundary values. A value of 0.0 causes the
contour to pass through them. A value of 2.0 causes the
contour to fall approximately halfway between the data
points.
Default Value = 2.0
C*12
Type of weighting used in grid initialization.

Default Value = SMOOTH, if METHOD =
WEIGHTED AVERAGE
or
SHARP, otherwise
Options:
SHARP
= Weight assigned to a data point used to

estimate a value for a grid node drops off
sharply with distance
SMOOTH
= Weight assigned to a data point used to

estimate a value for a grid node drops off
more gradually with distance
UNIFORM
= All data points used to estimate a value are

assigned the same weight
MINPTS
164
Minimum total number of points in the collection circle

around a grid node required to compute a grid value.
Default Value = 1
PERSECT
18
Maximum number of points per octant used to compute a

grid value.
Default Value = 4
MINSECT
18
Minimum number of octants in the collection circle that

are required to contain at least one data point in order to
compute a grid value.
Default Value = 1
Process
56
Landmark
Parameter
Name
EXTRAP
If a grid value cannot be computed based upon the values

provided for MINPTS, PERSECT and MINSECT, but
there are data points in EXTRAP of the grid nodes, then a
grid value is calculated.
Default Value = Same value as REACH
REFINE
Number of grid refinements.

Default Value = 1, if a non-faulted grid is used, which is
created using flexing with no control grid or a
DEFAULT AOI control grid
or
0, if METHOD = CLOSEST POINT,
DISTANCE, POINT DENSITY, or RANDOM
CLOSEST PNT
FLEXTYPE
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
C*12
SMOOTH
CUTOFF
Type of grid flexing algorithm.

Default Value = NONE, if METHOD = CLOSEST
POINT, DISTANCE, POINT DENSITY, or
RANDOM CLOSEST PNT
or
BIHARMONIC, otherwise
Options:
0.0
1.0
BIHARMONIC
= Biharmonic flexing
LAPLACIAN
= Laplacian flexing
COMBINATION
= Combination of Biharmonic and

Laplacian
NONE
= No flexing is desired
Smoothness modulus for flexing; there is a trade-off

between smoothing and honoring the data.
A value of 0 results in a strict fit to the original grid,
without concern for smoothness. A value of 1 produces
the smoothest grid, without concern for a precise fit to the
original grid.
Default Value = 0.2
Termination criterion for grid flexing.
This is the maximum normalized rate of change of the
overall surface smoothness from one flexing pass to the
next. Flexing terminates if the change is less than
CUTOFF and NUMPASS is greater than 0.
Process
57
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
NUMPASS
REPORT
ZNON
C*8
DEGORRAD C*8
R2003.12.0

Maximum number of flexing passes.
If the number is negative, then ABS (NUMPASS) flexing
passes are performed regardless of the value of CUTOFF.
If the number is positive, then NUMPASS is the upper
limit on the number of flexing passes.
Default Value = 10
Options:
NONE
= No report
PARTIAL
= Summary report
FULL
= Full report
Null data value for the output grid file.

Default Value = ZNON of the z field being gridded
Units in which the dip angle of the fault is measured.
Default Value = DEGREES
Options:
DEGREES
= Dip angle is measured in degrees
RADIANS
= Dip angle is measured in radians
AIM
Direction of the major axis of the 2D Kriging

semivariogram. Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Alternatively, the direction of a surface trend to honor in
other types of gridding. Measured clockwise from North.
Default Value = 0.0
RATIO
Ratio of major to minor axis of the 2D Kriging

semivariogram. Semivariogram defined along minor axis
is stretched by RATIO in direction AIM. Used if
METHOD = KRIGING.
Alternatively, the relative strength of the surface trend to
honor in other types of gridding.
Default Value = 1.0
Process
58
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
NUGGET

Semivariogram nugget, often referred to in the literature
as C0. Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Default Value = 0.0
SIL
Semivariogram sill parameter, also referred to in the

literature as C. Required if METHOD = KRIGING.
RANGE
Semivariogram range parameter. Required if METHOD =

KRIGING.
XBLOCK
Block dimension in x direction for use during Kriging. If

zero, then point Kriging. Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Note: Both XBLOCK and YBLOCK should be zero or
both should be nonzero.
Default Value = 0.0
YBLOCK
Block dimension in y direction for use during Kriging. If

zero, then point Kriging. Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Note: Both XBLOCK and YBLOCK should be zero or
both should be nonzero.
Default Value = 0.0
AIMUNIT
C*8
HULLFILE
C*24
MFDHULL
ERRESTM
R2003.12.0
C*24
Units of direction of 2D Kriging semivariograms or the

direction of the trend bias in any other type of gridding.
Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Default Value = DEGREES
Options:
DEGREES
= Direction of semivariogram is in
degrees.
RADIANS
= Direction of semivariogram is in
radians.
Name of the optional output file to contain the polygon(s)

bounding the grid nodes that are assigned values during
gridding. Used only if DATAHULL = CONVEX HULL,
CONCAVE HULL 1 or CONCAVE HULL 2.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output data hull file.

Default Value = 1
Name of output Kriging error grid. Required if METHOD
= KRIGING.
Process
59
Landmark
Parameter
Name
MFDERROR
SEMIVARO
Data
Type
I

05
Number of the MFD to contain the output Kriging error

file.
Default Value = 1
Type of semivariogram model to use.
Default Value = SPHERICAL
Options:
SPHERICAL
= C0 + C[(3H/2R) (H3/2R3)], for

H<R
= C0 + C, for H R
LINEAR
= C0 + C * H
EXPONENTIAL
= C0 + C[1 exp(H/R)]
GAUSSIAN
= C0 + C[1 exp(H2/R2)]
Key:
C0 = Nugget value (NUGGET)
H = Distance from the grid node to the control point
R = Range (RANGE)
C = Slope or sill level, depending on model chosen
(SIL)
R2003.12.0
Process
60
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DATAHULL
Data
Type

Algorithm used to determine which grid nodes get
initialized.
Default Value = DATA DISTRIBUTION
Options:
DATA
DISTRIBUTION
= Choice of nodes to initialize

depends on satisfying general
parameters such as number of
points in reach, number of
points, per octant, etc.; this
method is similar to that used
in old point gridding
CONVEX HULL
= Compute the convex hull of the

data, expand that hull by
EXTRAP, and grid all nodes
inside the expanded hull that
are with REACH of at least
one data point
CONCAVE HULL 1

data, determine small
concavities in that hull by
rolling a ball around it of
radius RADIUS, expand that
hull by EXTRAP, and grid all
nodes inside the expanded hull
that are in REACH of at least
one data point
CONCAVE HULL 2

data, determine concavities in
that hull by rolling a ball
around it of radius RADIUS,
expand that hull by EXTRAP,
and grid all nodes inside the
expanded hull that are in
REACH of at least one data
point
Note: Concavities in CONCAVE HULL 2 are larger than

the concavities computed using CONCAVE
HULL 1.
R2003.12.0
Process
61
Landmark
Parameter
Name
RADIUS
FLEXCTRL
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
R
C*16

Radius of a ball rolled around the convex hull of the input
data to determine concavities of that hull. Required if
DATAHULL = CONCAVE HULL 1 or CONCAVE
HULL 2.
Termination method for flexing.
Default Value = FLEX<=NUMPASS
Options:
FLEX=NUMPASS
= Causes flexing to occur

NUMPASS times without
regard to CUTOFF
FLEX<=NUMPASS
= Causes flexing to occur a

maximum of NUMPASS times;
a grid curvature change of less
than CUTOFF terminates
flexing
Process
62
Landmark
Polygon Clip
Name
POLYGON CLIP
Alternate Name CLIP POLYGON

Function
This process performs operations on polygons, including union,

intersection and subtraction.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
POLYIN1
MFDPOLY1
POLYIN2
MFDPOLY2
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
C*24
I
Name of the first input polygon file.

05
C*24
I
POLYOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
OPNAME
C*12
Number of the MFD that contains the first input polygon

file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input polygon file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the second input

polygon file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output polygon file.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output polygon file.

Default Value = 1
Operation to perform on the polygon file(s).
Default Value = INTERSECTION
Options:
INTERSECTION
= Intersect each polygon
UNION
= Union each polygon
SUBTRACT
= Subtract each polygon (POLYIN1

POLYIN2)
XFLD1
Field number of the x field in the first input polygon file.

YFLD1
Field number of the y field in the first input polygon file.

Process
63
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
IDFLD1
Field number of the Segment ID field in the first input

polygon file.
XFLD2
Field number of the x field in the second input polygon

file.
YFLD2
Field number of the y field in the second input polygon

file.
IDFLD2
Field number of the Segment ID field in the second input

polygon file.
Process
64
Landmark
Post Data
Name
POST DATA
Alternate Name DATA POSTING

Function
This process posts a symbol and specified field valu(s)e at each control
point location, such as a well or a bore hole. The frequency for posting
and labeling is variable, as is the position of the posted field relative to
the symbol.
Notes

Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
DATAIN
C*24
Name of the posting file.
MFDIN
INFLD
Array of up to 12 field numbers of the fields to post. At

least one is needed if LABLRATE is not 0.
SYMBOL
Default symbol to post; ignored if a symbol field is on the

file. See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in
the Z-MAP Plus Reference manual for available symbols.
Default Value = 1, a cross
POSTRATE
Rate for posting control points. Every POSTRATEth

point is posted; if POSTRATE = 1, all points are posted.
Default Value = 1
LABLRATE
Rate for labeling posted points. Every LABLRATEth

posted point is labeled; if LABLRATE = 0, no points are
labeled.
If LABLRATE is zero, then you do not need to specify
INFLD, LOCATION, NDECIMAL, LABLSIZE, or
ZNON.
Default Value = 1
SYMBSIZE
Symbol height, in plotter units (in or cm).

05

Default Value = 0
Process
65
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LOCATION
C*8

Array of up to 12 locations of field labels relative to the
posted symbol, in the same position as the field to post
from INFLD.
A maximum of five separate fields can be stacked at each
location, up to a combined maximum of 12 fields.
Default Value = ABOVE
Options:
ABOVE
= Post label above the symbol
BELOW
= Post label below the symbol
RIGHT
= Post label to the right of the symbol
LEFT
= Post label to the left of the symbol
CENTERED
= Center the label at the well location.

This is usually only used if no symbol
is posted. Post only one field label at
this location.
LABLSIZE
Array of up to 12 heights of labels posted, in plotter units

(in or cm) in the same position as the field to post from
INFLD.
NDECIMAL
Array of up to 12 numbers of decimal places to post, in

the same position as the field to post from INFLD.
Default Value = 0
ZNON
Array of up to 12 ZNONs (null values), in the same

position as the field to post from INFLD.
Default Value = 1.0E+30
Process
66
Landmark
Post Data New

Name
POST DATA NEW
Alternate Name DATA POSTING NEW

Function
Enhanced posting of data, lines and wells. Data that can be posted
include control points, faults, polylines (vertex) and deviated well files.
This process improves on the POST LINES Process by allowing data
to post along the lines. Selective posting has been added and the size
and color options for lines, symbols and labels have been greatly
enhanced. A method for plotting a scale with ticks and labels along the
lines has been provided. Line type has been expanded to include a
pattern table and ways to vary line pattern by z field. Symbol rotation
has also been added.
The capability of the POST DATA Process has been improved by
allowing selective posting of data, expanding options for symbol size,
and introducing multiple options for color choice for symbols and
labels. Choice of fonts has also been added and bubble map parameters
are found in this portion of the process.
The well posting ability of this process handles deviated and
nondeviated wells. For posting deviated wells, both the line and data
posting portions of the process are involved. There is a selective
posting function for primary and secondary lines (well traces). A scale
with ticks and labels can be plotted along the well traces.
Notes
Z-MAP Plus allows selective line posting only in POST DEVIATED

WELLS. ZCL allows selective line posting for any line, for example,
posting lease block outlines with two sets of line parameters
corresponding to two owners.
For calculated defaults, a nice number is a power of ten times 1, 2,
2.5, 4 or 5.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
C*24
MFDIN
XFLD
Name of input file to post.

Range Options:
Data, fault, vertex and deviated well files
05

Default Value = 0
Field number of x field in the input file.
Process
67
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
YFLD
SEGIDFLD
WELLFLD
CLIPMODE
UNITS

Field number of y field in the input file.
Field number of the Segment ID field. If the file is a
deviated well file, then it must have this field; otherwise
this field is optional. See PSTMODET.
Field number of the Well Name or Platform Identifier
field. If the file is a deviated well file, then it must have
this field; otherwise this field is optional.
Default Value = First Well Name or Platform Identifier
field
C*8
Clipping of data outside the AOI border.

Default Value = CLIP
Options:
C*8
CLIP
= Do not display the data outside the border.
NOCLIP
= Display the data outside the border.
Units for the coordinates of the points.

Options:
PLOTTER
= Plotter units (in or cm)
USER
= Engineering or user coordinates (feet/

meter)
Parameters for posting top data

NUMFLDT
TOPFLDS
R2003.12.0
I
I
012
Number of fields to post at top locations.

Default Value = 0
Array of up to 12 field numbers for the fields to post at the
top locations. May be of any type. Required if
NUMFLOT > 0.
Default Value = None
Process
68
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for posting top data symbols

PSTMODET C*8
SLCTTFLD
PSTRATET
SYMMODET C*8
R2003.12.0
Posting mode for top locations. For control points without

SEG ID, all points are treated as tops; without SEG ID,
choose OMIT.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
ALL
= Post all top locations
SELECT
= Posts top locations where field SLCTTFLD

is defined
OMIT
= Do not post at top locations
Field number of the select field for posting at top

locations. Values are posted only at locations where this
field is defined. Used if PSTMODET = SELECT.
Posting rate for top locations. For example, if PSTRATET
= 5, every 5th top location is posted.
Default Value = 1
Determine symbol to post at top locations.
Default Value = NUMBER
Options:
NUMBER
= Use symbol number given by SYMNUMT
FIELD
= Use symbol code field given by

SYMTFLD
OMIT
= Do not post symbol
SYMNUMT
Number of the symbol to post at top location. Used if

SYMMODET = NUMBER.
Default Value = 1
SYMTFLD
Field number for the symbol code field used to determine

the symbol to post at the top locations. Used if
SYMMODET = FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field
Process
69
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for size of posted top symbols

SIZMODET
C*8
Method for determining the top symbol size.

Default Value = VALUE
Options:
VALUE
= Use size of symbol given by SYMSIZET.
FIELD
= Use size field given by SIZTFLD.
CLASS
= Use vary by z field given by ZSIZTFLD to

vary symbol size. Size is determined by table
ZCLSMXTS, SZINCT, CLSLEVT,
ZCLSMINT.
AREA
= Use vary by z field given by ZSIZTFLD to

vary symbol size.
SIZE =
4
--- SZSCALET ( field value SZOFFSTT )
DIAMETER
= Use vary by z field given by ZSIZTFLD

to vary symbol size.
SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTT) *
SZSCALET
R2003.12.0
SYMSIZET
Size of symbol posted at top locations, in plotter units

(in or cm). Used if SIZMODET = VALUE.
SIZTFLD
Field number for the symbol size field used to determine

the size of the symbol to post at the top locations. Used if
SIZMODET = FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Size field
ZSIZTFLD
Field number for the z field used to vary the size of the top
symbols. Used if SIZMODET = DIAMETER, AREA or
CLASS.
Process
70
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SZOFFSTT

Offset for top symbol size calculation. Used if
SIZMODET = DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTT) * SZSCALET
For area: SIZE =
4
Default Value = 0.99999 * minimum data value

SZSCALET
Scale for top symbol size calculation. Used if

SIZMODET = DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTT) * SZSCALET
For area: SIZE =
4
Default Value = 0.25/data range

SZMINT
Minimum size of symbol to post at tops, in plotter units

(in or cm). Used if SIZMODET = DIAMETER, AREA or
CLASS.
SZMAXT
Maximum size of symbol to post at tops, in plotter units

(in or cm). Used if SIZMODET = DIAMETER or AREA.
SZINCT
Symbol size increment at tops, in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if SIZMODET = CLASS.
CLSLEVT
ZCLSMINT
Minimum z value to post top symbol. Used if SIZMODET

= CLASS.
Default Value = Minimum data value
ZCLSMXTS
Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals

used to determine the top symbol size. Used if
SIZMODET = CLASS.
Default Value = Data range is divided into CLSLEVT
nice intervals
16
Number of class intervals for top symbol size. Used if

SIZMODET = CLASS.
Default Value = 2
Parameters for posting top symbol color
R2003.12.0
Process
71
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CLRMODET C*8
Method for defining the color of the symbol at top

locations.
Default Value = INDEX
Options:
INDEX
= Use color index given by SYMCLRT
FIELD
= Use field given by CLRTFLD
Z-FIELD
= Vary color based on z field given by

ZCLRTFLD
SYMCLRT
CLRTFLD
Field number for the color field used to determine color

for the top symbols. Used if CLRMODET = FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field
ZCLRTFLD
Field number for the z field used to vary the color of the
top symbols. Used if CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.
ZTBLMODT C*16
STRTCLRT
R2003.12.0
0255 Color index for symbols at top locations. Used if

CLRMODET = INDEX.
Default Value = 10
Method for defining color divisions. Used if CLRMODET

= Z-FIELD.
Default Value = DIVIDE
Options:
NONE
= User specified; divisions taken from ZCLRTS.
DIVIDE
= Divide the data range into CLRLEVT

divisions. A nice starting z value and
increment are calculated.
INCREMENT
= Compute a nice starting z

value and increment by
ZINCT.
INCREMENT+START
= Start at ZSTARTT and

increment by ZINCT.
0255 Starting color index to use to post top symbols. Used if

CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56
Process
72
Landmark
Parameter
Name
ZCLRTS
Data
Type
Array of up to 50 maximum z values for color indices to

use if posting top symbols. Used if CLRMODET =
Z-FIELD. Required if ZTBLMODT = NONE.
CLRLEVT
150
Number of color levels to use to post top symbols. Used if

CLRMODET = Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODT = DIVIDE or
NONE.
Default Value = 10
ZINCT
Increment to use to change color levels. Used if

ZTBLMODT = INCREMENT or
INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data range/ZINCT 50
Default Value = Data range/CLRLEVT
ZSTARTT
Starting z value for color change. Used if ZTBLMODT =

INCREMENT+START.
Parameters for posting top data labels

LBCMODTS C*8
R2003.12.0
Array of up to 12 label color modes for posting the fields

at top locations, listed in the same position as the
corresponding field in TOPFLDS.
Options:
INDEX
= Use color indices given by LBLCLRTS.
FIELD
= Use field given by LCLRTFDS.
SYMBOL
= Use the color of the symbol.
LBLCLRTS
0255 Array of up to 12 color indices for fields posted at top

locations, listed in the same position as the corresponding
label in LBCMODTS. Used if LBCMODTS = INDEX.
Default Value = 5
LCLRTFDS
Array of up to 12 field numbers for the color fields to use

to determine color for the top labels, listed in the same
position as the corresponding label in LBCMODTS.Used
if LBCMODTS = FIELD
Default Value = First color field
Process
73
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LBLRATET
FONTTS
C*8

Label rate for top symbols. For example, if LBLRATET =
5, every 5th top location is labeled.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 12 font types for posting the fields at top
locations, listed in the same position as the corresponding
label in LBCMODTS.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
NDECTS
LOCATET
LBLSZTS
R2003.12.0
C*8
Array of up to 12 values for the number of decimals to

post for the fields at top locations, listed in the same
position as the corresponding field in TOPFLDS.
Default Value = 0
from TOPFLDS.
Options:
ABOVE
= Above the top symbol
BELOW
= Below the top symbol
RIGHT
= Right of the top symbol
LEFT
= Left of the top symbol
CENTERED
= At the well location. Normally this is

used only if no symbol is posted.
Array of up to 12 label sizes for posting the fields at top

locations in plotter units (in or cm), listed in the same
position as the corresponding label in LBCMODTS.
Process
74
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for posting bottom data

NUMFLDB
BOTFLDS
012
Number of fields to post at bottom locations.

Default Value = 0
bottom locations. May be of any type. Used if
NUMFLDB > 0.
Parameters for posting bottom data symbols

PSTMODEB C*8
Posting mode for bottom locations.

Options:
ALL
= Post at all bottom locations
SELECT
= Posts at bottom locations where field

SLCTBFLD is defined
OMIT
= Do not post at bottom locations
SLCTBFLD
Field number of the select field for posting at bottom

locations. Values are posted only at locations where this
field is defined. Used if PSTMODEB = SELECT.
PSTRATEB
Posting rate for bottom locations. For example, if

PSTRATEB = 5, every 5th bottom location is posted.
Default Value = 1
Parameters for size of posted bottom symbols

SYMMODEB C*8
R2003.12.0
Method for determining symbol to post at bottom

locations.
Options:
NUMBER
= Use symbol number given by SYMNUMB
FIELD
= Use symbol code field given by SYMBFLD
OMIT
Process
75
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SYMNUMB
Number of the symbol to post at bottom location. Used if

SYMMODEB = NUMBER.
Default Value = 1
SYMBFLD

the symbol to post at the bottom locations. Used if
SYMMODEB = FIELD.
SIZMODEB
C*8
Method for determining the bottom symbol size.

Options:
VALUE
= Use size of symbol given by SYMSIZEB.
FIELD
= Use size field given by SIZBFLD.
CLASS
= Use z field given by ZSIZBFLD to vary

symbol size. Size is determined by table
ZCLSMXBS, SZINCB, CLSLEVB,
ZCLSMINB.
AREA

symbol size.
SIZE =
4
--- SZSCALEB ( field value SZOFFSTB )
DIAMETER

symbol size.
SIZE = (field value +
SZOFFSTB)SZSCALEB
R2003.12.0
SYMSIZEB
Size of symbol posted at bottom locations, in plotter units

(in or cm). Used if SIZMODEB = VALUE.
SIZBFLD

the size of the symbol to post at the bottom locations.
Used if SIZMODEB = FIELD.
ZSIZBFLD
Field number for the z field used to vary the size of the
bottom symbols. Used if SIZMODEB = DIAMETER,
AREA or CLASS.
Process
76
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SZOFFSTB

Offset for bottom symbol size calculation. Used if
SIZMODEB = DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTB)SZSCALEB
For area: SIZE =
4
Default Value = 0.99999*minimum data value

SZSCALEB
Scale for bottom symbol size calculation. Used if

SIZMODEB = DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTB)SZSCALEB
For area: SIZE =
4
R2003.12.0
SZMINB
Minimum size of symbol to post at bottoms, in plotter

units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEB = DIAMETER,
AREA or CLASS.
SZMAXB
Maximum size of symbol to post at bottoms, in plotter

units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEB = DIAMETER or
AREA.
SZINCB
Symbol size increment for bottom symbols, in plotter

units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEB = CLASS.
CLSLEVB
ZCLSMINB
Minimum z value to post bottom symbol. Used if

SIZMODEB = CLASS.
ZCLSMXBS

used to determine the bottom symbol size. Used if
SIZMODEB = CLASS.
Default Value = Data range is divided into CLSLEVB
nice intervals.
16
Number of class intervals for bottom symbol size. Used if

SIZMODEB = CLASS.
Default Value = 2
Process
77
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for color of posted bottom symbols

CLRMODEB C*8
INDEX
= Use color index given by SYMCLRB
FIELD
= Use field given by CLRBFLD
Z-FIELD

ZCLRBFLD
SYMCLRB
CLRBFLD

for the bottom symbols. Used if CLRMODEB = FIELD.
ZCLRBFLD
bottom symbols. Used if CLRMODEB = DIAMETER,
AREA or CLASS.
ZTBLMODB C*16
R2003.12.0
Method for defining color of symbols at bottom locations.

Options:
0255 Color index for symbols at bottom locations. Used if

CLRMODEB = INDEX.
Default Value = 10
Method for defining color divisions. Used if

CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.
Options:
NONE
= User specified; divisions taken from

ZCLRBS.
DIVIDE
= Divide the data range into CLRLEVB

INCREMENT

ZINCB.
INCREMENT+START
= Start at ZSTARTB and

increment by ZINCB.
Process
78
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
STRTCLRB
ZCLRBS

0255 Starting color index to use to post bottom symbols. Used
if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56
CLRLEVB
ZINCB
ZSTARTB

use if posting bottom symbols. Used if CLRMODEB =
Z-FIELD. Required if ZTBLMODB = NONE.
150
Number of color levels to use to post bottom symbols.

Used if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODB =
DIVIDE.
Default Value = 10
ZTBLMODB = INCREMENT or
INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data Range/ZINCB 50
Default Value = Data Range/CLRLEVB
Starting z value for color change. Used if ZTBLMODB =
INCREMENT+START.
Parameters for posting bottom labels

LBCMODBS C*8
LBLCLRBS
R2003.12.0
Array of up to 12 label color modes for posting the fields

at bottom locations, in the same position as the
corresponding field from BOTFLDS.
Options:
INDEX
= Use color indices given by LBLCLRBS.
FIELD
= Use field given by LCLRBFDS.
SYMBOL
0255 Array of up to 12 color indices for posting the fields at

bottom locations, in the same position as the
corresponding label from LBCMODBS. Used if
LBCMODBS = INDEX.
Default Value = 6
Process
79
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LCLRBFDS
Array of up to 12 field numbers for the color fields to use

to determine color for the bottom labels, in the same
position as the corresponding label from LBCMODBS.
LBLRATEB
Label rate for bottom symbols. For example, if

LBLRATEB = 5, every 5th bottom location is labeled.
Default Value = 1
FONTBS
C*8
Array of up to 12 font types for posting the fields at

bottom locations, in the same position as the
corresponding label from LBCMODBS.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
NDECBS
R2003.12.0
Array of up to 12 values for the number of decimals to

post for the fields at bottom locations, in the same position
as the corresponding label from LBCMODBS.
Default Value = 0
Process
80
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LOCATEB
C*8
LBLSZBS

from BOTFLDS.
Options:
ABOVE
= Above the bottom symbol
BELOW
= Below the bottom symbol
RIGHT
= Right of the bottom symbol
LEFT
= Left of the bottom symbol
CENTERED
= At the well location. Normally this is used

only if no symbol is posted.
Array of up to 12 label sizes for posting the fields at

bottom locations, in plotter units (in or cm), in the same
position as the corresponding field from BOTFLDS.
Parameters for posting lines
R2003.12.0
NUMFLDI
LINEFLDS
02
Number of fields to post at line point locations.

Default Value = 0
location of points along lines. May be of any type. Used if
NUMFLDI > 0.
Process
81
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
PSTMODEL C*12
SLCTLFLD
R2003.12.0

Line posting mode.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL
= Post all lines using primary line

parameters.
PRIMARY
= Base choice of parameters on

SLCTLFLD. If the value of
SLCTLFLD for the first point on a
line is not null use the primary
parameters for that line. If the first
value is null use the secondary
parameters for that line.
SECONDARY
= Base choice of parameters on

SLCTLFLD. If the value of
SLCTLFLD for the first point on a
line is not null, use the secondary
parameters for that line. If the first
value is null, use the primary
parameters.
Field number of the select field for posting lines. Primary

or secondary posting parameters are used depending on
whether this field is defined. Must be a real valued field.
Used if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY or SECONDARY.
Process
82
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for posting lines if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY

LINETYPE
R2003.12.0
C*12
Type of line to connect points with the same Segment ID.

This is the line type for drawing primary lines. For a
deviated well file, this is the well traces.
Options:
PATTERN
= Use pattern given by LINEPAT.
SOLID
= Plain solid line.
SINGLE DASH
= Dash 1, gap 1 pattern.
DOUBLE
DASH
= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2 pattern.
TRIPLE DASH
= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2, dash 3,

gap 3 pattern.
HACHURE
= Hachure pattern.
Z-FIELD
= Vary pattern based on z field given by

ZPATLFLD.
OMIT
= Do not draw line.
LINEWGHT
18
Multiple of normal line width for drawing primary lines.

Default Value = 1
LINEPAT
120
Pattern number for drawing primary lines. See Appendix

C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus
Reference manual for examples.
Default Value = 1
DASHONE
Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the first dash in dash

pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
SINGLE DASH, DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
DASHTWO
Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the second dash in

dash pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if
LINETYPE = DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Process
83
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DASHTHR
Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the third dash in dash

TRIPLE DASH.
GAPONE
Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the first gap in dash

GAPTWO
Length, in plotter units (in/cm,) of the second gap in dash

DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
GAPTHR
Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the third gap in dash

TRIPLE DASH.
HACHLEN
Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the hachures in

hachure pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if
LINETYPE = HACHURE.
HACHGAP
Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the gap in hachure

HACHURE.
HACHDIR
C*8
Direction of hachures relative to direction of the primary

line. Used if LINETYPE = HACHURE.
Default Value = LEFT
Options:
LEFT
= Draw hachures on relative left side of line.
RIGHT
= Draw hachures on relative right side of line.
Process
84
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for posting lines if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY & LINETYPE = Z-FIELD

ZTBLMODP C*16
ZPATLFLD
STRTPAT
ZPATRNS
R2003.12.0
Method for defining line type divisions. Used if

LINETYPE = Z-FIELD.
Options:
ZINCP

ZPATRNS.
DIVIDE
= Divide the data range into PATLEVS

INCREMENT

ZINCP.
INCREMENT+START
= Start at ZSTARTP and

increment by ZINCP.
Field number for the z field used to vary the pattern used
to draw lines. Used if LINETYPE = Z-FIELD.
120
PATLEVS
NONE
Starting pattern number to use to draw primary lines. Used

if LINETYPE = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 20 maximum z values for line patterns to
use if drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
Z-FIELD. Required if ZTBLMODP = NONE.
120
Number of patterns to use to draw primary lines. Used if

LINETYPE = Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODP = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 10
Increment to use to change patterns. Used if
ZTBLMODP = INCREMENT or
INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data Range/ZINCP 10. If the number of patterns
is greater than 10, then PATLEVS must be
specified.
Default Value = Data range/PATLEVS
Process
85
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZSTARTP

Starting value for pattern change. Used if ZTBLMODP =
INCREMENT+START.
Parameters for posting line colors if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY

CLRMODEL C*8
R2003.12.0
Method for defining the color of the primary lines.

Options:
INDEX
= Use color index given by LINECLR
FIELD
= Use field given by LINCLFLD
Z-FIELD

ZCLRLFLD
LINECLR
0255 Color index for drawing primary lines. Used if

CLRMODEL = INDEX.
Default Value = 13
CLRLFLD
Field number for the color field used to determine the

color for lines. Used if CLRMODEL = FIELD.
ZCLRLFLD
Field number for the z field used to vary the color of lines.
Used if CLRMODEL = Z-FIELD.
Process
86
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for posting line colors if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY & CLRMODEL =

Z-FIELD
ZTBLMODL C*16
STRTCLRL
ZCLRLS
R2003.12.0
Method for defining color divisions. Used if CLRMODEL

= Z-FIELD.
Options:
NONE
= User specified; division taken from ZCLRLS.
DIVIDE
= Divide the data range into CLRLEVL

INCREMENT

ZINCL.
INCREMENT+START
= Start at ZSTARTL and

increment by ZINCL.
0255 Starting color index to use to draw primary lines. Used if

CLRMODEL = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56

use when drawing primary lines. Used if CLRMODEL =
Z-FIELD. Required if ZTBLMODL = NONE.
CLRLEVL
150
Number of color levels to use to draw primary lines. Used

if CLRMODEL = Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODL = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 10
ZINCL

ZTBLMODL = INCREMENT or
INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data Range/ZINCL .LE. 50
Default Value = Data range/CLRLEVL
ZSTARTL
Starting value for color change. Used if ZTBLMODL =

INCREMENT+START.
Process
87
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for posting lines if PSTMODEL = SECONDARY

LINTYPE2
C*12
Secondary line type parameter. Used if PSTMODEL =

SECONDARY.
Default Value = PRIMARY
Options:
PATTERN
= Use pattern given by LINPAT2
SOLID
= Plain solid line
SINGLE DASH = Dash 1, gap 1 pattern
R2003.12.0
120
DOUBLE
DASH
= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2 pattern
TRIPLE DASH
= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2, dash 3,

gap 3 pattern
HACHURE
= Hachure pattern
PRIMARY
= Use primary line pattern parameters
OMIT
= Do not draw line
LINPAT2
Line pattern number for secondary lines. See Appendix C.

Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus
Reference manual for examples.
Default Value = 1
DASHONE2
Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the first dash in dash

pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if LINTYPE2 =
DASHTWO2
Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the second dash in

dash pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if
LINTYPE2 = DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
DASHTHR2
Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the third dash in dash

TRIPLE DASH.
Process
88
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
GAPONE2
Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the first gap in dash

GAPTWO2
Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the second gap in dash

DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
GAPTHR2
Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the third gap in dash

TRIPLE DASH.
HACHLEN2
Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the hachures in

hachure pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if
LINTYPE2 = HACHURE.
HACHGAP2
Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the gap in hachure

HACHURE.
HACHDIR2
C*8
LINWGHT2
R2003.12.0
Direction of hachures relative to direction of the

secondary line. Used if LINTYPE2 = HACHURE.
Options:
18
LEFT
= Draw hachures on relative left side of line.
RIGHT
= Draw hachures on relative right side of line.
Multiple of normal line width for drawing secondary

lines.
Default Value = 1
Process
89
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for posting line colors if PSTMODEL = SECONDARY

CLRMODL2 C*8
LINCLR2
Method for defining the color of the secondary lines.

Default Value = PRIMARY
Options:
INDEX
= Use color index given by LINCLR2
PRIMARY
= Use same color parameters as for primary

lines
0255 Color index for drawing secondary lines. Used if

CLRMODE2 = INDEX.
Default Value = 13
Parameters for posting point locations along lines

PSTMODEI
R2003.12.0
C*8
Posting mode for points along lines. For deviated wells,

these are the intermediate points along the well traces. For
faults and vertices, these are all the points. For control
points without SEG ID, all points are treated as tops;
without SEG ID, use OMIT.
Options:
ALL
= Post symbols at points along lines
SELECT
= Post symbols only if SLCTIFLD is defined
OMIT
= Do not post at points along lines
SLCTIFLD
Field number of the select field for posting points along

lines. Values are posted only at locations where this field
is defined. Must be a REAL valued field. Used if
PSTMODEI = SELECT.
PSTRATEI
Posting rate for points along lines. For example, if

PSTRATEI = 5, every 5th point along the line is posted.
Default Value = 1
Process
90
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SYMMODEI C*8

Determine symbol to post at the location of points along
lines. Used if PSTMODEI = ALL or SELECT.
Options:
NUMBER
= Use symbol number given by SYMNUMI
FIELD
= Use symbol code field given by SYMIFLD
OMIT
SYMNUMI
Number of the symbol to post at the location of points

along lines. Used if SYMMODEI = NUMBER.
Default Value = 1
SYMIFLD

the symbol to post at the location of points along lines.
Used if SYMMODEI = FIELD.
Parameters for size of symbols posted at point locations along lines

SIZMODEI
C*8
Method for determining the size for symbols posted at

points along lines.
Options:
VALUE
= Use size of symbol given by SYMSIZEI.
FIELD
= Use size field given by SIZIFLD.
CLASS
= Use z field given by ZSIZIFLD to vary

symbol size. Size is determined by table
ZCLSMXIS, SZINCI, CLSLEVI,
ZCLSMINI.
AREA

symbol size.
SIZE =
4
DIAMETER

symbol size.
SIZE = (field value +
SZOFFSTI)SZSCALEI
R2003.12.0
Process
91
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SYMSIZEI
Size of symbol posted at the location of points along lines

in plotter units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEI = VALUE.
SIZIFLD

the size of the symbol to post at the location of points
along lines. Used if SIZMODEI = FIELD.
Parameters for size of symbols posted at point locations along lines if SIZMODEI =
DIAMETER, AREA or CLASS
ZSIZIFLD
Field number for the z field used to vary the size of the
symbol posted at the location of points along lines. Used
if SIZMODEI = DIAMETER, AREA or CLASS.
SZOFFSTI
Offset for symbol size calculation for symbols posted at

the location of points along lines. Used if SIZMODEI =
DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTI)SZSCALEI
For area: SIZE =
4
Default Value = 0.99999*minimum data value

SZSCALEI
Scale for symbol size calculation for symbols posted at

the location of points along lines. Used if SIZMODEI =
DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTI)SZSCALEI
For area: SIZE =
4
R2003.12.0
SZMINI
Minimum symbol size to post at the location of points

along lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEI
= DIAMETER, AREA or CLASS.
SZMAXI
Maximum symbol size to post at the location of points

along lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEI
= DIAMETER or AREA.
Process
92
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CLSLEVI
ZCLSMINI
Minimum z value to post symbol at the location of points

along lines. Used if SIZMODEI = CLASS.
ZCLSMXIS

used to determine the size of symbols at the location of
points along lines. Used if SIZMODEI = CLASS.
Default Value = Data range is divided into CLSLEVI
nice intervals
SZINCI
Symbol size increment for symbols posted at the location

of points along lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used if
SIZMODEI = CLASS.
16
Number of class intervals for symbol size of symbol

posted at the location of points along lines. Used if
SIZMODEI = CLASS.
Default Value = 2
Parameters for color of symbols posted at point locations along a line

CLRMODEI
R2003.12.0
C*8
Method for defining the color of the symbol posted at the

location of points along lines.
Options:
INDEX
= Use color index given by SYMCLRI
FIELD
= Use field given by CLRIFLD
Z-FIELD

ZCLRIFLD
LINE
= Use same color as line
SYMCLRI
0255 Color index for symbols posted at the location of points

along lines. Used if CLRMODEI = INDEX.
Default Value = 8
CLRIFLD

for symbols posted at the location of points along lines.
Used if CLRMODEI = FIELD.
Process
93
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZCLRIFLD
symbol posted at the location of points along lines. Used
if CLRMODEI = Z-FIELD.
ZTBLMODI
C*16
Method for defining color divisions. Used if CLRMODEI

= Z-FIELD.
Options:
STRTCLRI
ZCLRIS
R2003.12.0
NONE

ZCLRIS.
DIVIDE
= Divide the data range into CLRLEVI

INCREMENT

ZINCI.
INCREMENT+START
= Start at ZSTARTI and

increment by ZINCI.
0255 Starting color index for posting symbols at the location of

points along lines. Used if CLRMODEI = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56

use when posting symbols at the location of points along
lines. Used if CLRMODEI = Z-FIELD. Required if
ZTBLMODI = NONE.
CLRLEVI
150
Number of color levels to use to post symbols at the

location of points along lines. Used if CLRMODEI =
Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODI = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 10
ZINCI

ZTBLMODI = INCREMENT or INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data Range/ZINCI 50
Default Value = Data range/CLRLEVI
ZSTARTI
Starting value for ZCLRIS. Used if ZTBLMODI =

INCREMENT+START.
Process
94
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for rotating symbols posted at point locations along lines

ROTMODEI C*12
ROTATEI
Method for defining the angle of rotation of symbols

posted at the location of points along the line.
Options:
0.0
360.0
VALUE
= Each posted symbol is rotated

counterclockwise by ROTATEI degrees
from the y axis.
PARALLEL
= Each posted symbol follows the

orientation of the preceding and
subsequent points along the line.
Angle of rotation for symbols posted at the location of

points along the line. The angle is in degrees and
measured counterclockwise from the y axis. Used if
ROTMODEI = VALUE.
Default Value = 0.0
Parameters for posting labels at point locations along lines

LBCMODIS
LBLCLRIS
R2003.12.0
C*8
Array of up to 2 label color modes for posting the fields at

the location of points along lines, corresponding to the
fields in LINEFLDS (page 81).
Options:
INDEX
= Use color indices given by LBLCLRIS.
SYMBOL
LINE
= Use the color of the line.
0255 Array of up to 2 color indices for posting the fields at the

location of points along lines, corresponding to the label
color mode in LBCMODIS. Used if LBCMODIS =
INDEX.
Default Value = 8
Process
95
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FONTIS
C*8

Array of up to 2 font types for posting the fields at the
location of points along lines, corresponding to the fields
in LINEFLDS.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
NDECIS
LOCATEI
C*8
Array of up to 2 values for the number of decimals to post

for the fields at the location of points along lines,
corresponding to the fields in LINEFLDS.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 2 options for posting the fields at the
location of points along lines, corresponding to the fields
in LINEFLDS. Labels are posted perpendicular to the
lines they reference.
Options:
LEFT
= Left of the symbol
RIGHT
= Right of the symbol
LBLSZIS
Array of up to 2 label sizes for posting the fields at the

location of points along lines in plotter units (in or cm),
corresponding to the fields in LINEFLDS.
LBLRATEI
Label rate for symbols at the location of points along

lines. For example, if LBLRATEI = 5, every 5th location
is labeled.
Default Value = 1
Parameters for ticks and tick labels posted along lines

TICKFLD
R2003.12.0
Field number for the z field used to post tick marks and
tick labels along lines. If this is a depth field, a depth scale
is produced. Used if TICKMODE = TICKS or
TICKS+LABELS.
Process
96
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TICKMODE C*12
TICKS
= Plot tick marks at specified

increment
TICKS+LABELS
= Plot tick marks at specified

increment and label with the value
OMIT
= Do not plot a scale
TICKLEN
TICKWGHT
ZTICKMIN
Minimum value for plotting ticks and labels. Used if

TICKMODE = TICKS or TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = Minimum value of TICKFLD plus
ZTICKINC
ZTICKMAX
Maximum value for plotting ticks and labels. Used if

Default Value = Maximum value of TICKFLD
ZTICKINC
Increment between tick marks on scale. Used if

Default Value = (ZTICKMAX ZTICKMIN)/10.0
CLRMODTK C*8
R2003.12.0
Method for plotting a scale on lines based on the values of

field TICKFLD. If TICKFLD is a depth field, this is a
depth scale for well traces.
Options:
Length of the tick in plotter units (in or cm) to plot on the

scale. Used if TICKMODE = TICKS or
TICKS+LABELS.
18
Multiple of normal line width for plotting ticks on the

scale. Used if TICKMODE = TICKS or
TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = 1
Method for defining the color of the ticks.

Default Value = LINE
Options:
INDEX
= Use color index given by TICKCLR
LINE
= Use color of line
Process
97
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TICKCLR

0255 Color index for drawing ticks. Used if CLRMODTK =
INDEX.
Default Value = 8
LBCMODTK C*8
LBLCLRTK
FONTTK
Source of color for labels posted on scales. Used if

TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = TICK
Options:
INDEX
= Use color index given by LBLCLRTK
TICK
= Use same color as tick mark
LINE
= Use same color as line
0255 Color index for labels posted on scales. Used if

TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS and LBCMODTK =
INDEX.
Default Value = 8
C*8
Font type for labels posted on scales. Used if TICKMODE

= TICKS+LABELS.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
NDECTK
LOCATETK
R2003.12.0
Number of decimals for labels posted on scales. Used if

Default Value = 0
C*8
Location for labels posted on scales. Labels are posted

perpendicular to the lines they reference Used if
Options:
LEFT
= Left of the line
RIGHT
= Right of the line
Process
98
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LBLSZTK
LBLORITK
C*16

Label size in plotter units (in or cm) for labels posted on
scales. Used if TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS.
Orientation of the labels relative to the line. Used if
Default Value = PERPENDICULAR
Options:
PERPENDICULAR
= Rotate labels so they are

perpendicular to the direction
of the line.
PARALLEL
= Rotate labels so they are

parallel to the direction of the
line.
Process
99
Landmark
Post Data to ZGF

The data is posted to the graphics file if it has not already been
posted.
R2003.12.0
Process
100
Landmark
Post DLS
Name
POST DLS
Alternate Name DLS POSTING

Function
This process posts the Dominion Land Survey (DLS). It controls the
types of lines and labels used to draw Township borders, Section
borders, Quarter-section lines, and Legal Subdivision lines, and it
controls the drawing of Township and Section labels, and Road
Allowances.
Notes

Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TOWNLINE C*8
SECTLINE
R2003.12.0
C*8

Line type of the Township borders.
Options:
NONE
= Do not draw Township lines.
PLAIN
= Draw normal Township lines.
DASHED
= Draw dashed Township lines.
BOLD
= Draw bold Township lines.
Line type of the Section borders.

Options:
NONE
= Do not draw Section lines.
PLAIN
= Draw normal Section lines.
DASHED
= Draw dashed Section lines.
BOLD
= Draw bold Section lines.
Process
101
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
QRTRLINE
C*8
SUBDLINE
C*8
TOWNLABL C*4
SECTLABL
C*4
ROADALLW C*4
R2003.12.0

Line type of the Quarter-section borders.
Options:
NONE
= Do not draw Quarter-section lines.
PLAIN
= Draw normal Quarter-section lines.
DASHED
= Draw dashed Quarter-section lines.
BOLD
= Draw bold Quarter-section lines.
Line type for the Legal Subdivisions lines.

Options:
NONE
= Do not draw Legal Subdivision lines.
PLAIN
= Draw normal Legal Subdivision lines.
DASHED
= Draw dashed Legal Subdivision lines.
BOLD
= Draw bold Legal Subdivision lines.
Township labels indicator.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label the townships.
NO
= Do not label the townships.
Section labels indicator.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label the sections.
NO
= Do not label the sections.
Road Allowances labels indicator.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label the road allowances.
NO
= Do not label the road allowances.
Process
102
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
TOWNDASH
Length of the dash for Township boundaries, in plotter

units (in or cm).
TOWNSPCE
Length of the space between dashes for Township

boundaries, in plotter units (in or cm).
SECTDASH
Length of the dash for Section boundaries, in plotter units

(in or cm).
SECTSPCE
Length of the space between dashes for Section

QRTRDASH
Length of the dash for Quarter-section boundaries, in

plotter units (in or cm).
QRTRSPCE
Length of the space between dashes for Quarter-section

SUBDDASH
Length of the dash for Legal Subdivision boundaries, in

SUBDSPCE
Length of the space between dashes for Legal Subdivision

TOWNHGHT
Height of Township labels, in plotter units (in or cm).

SECTHGHT
Height of Section labels, in plotter units (in or cm).

Process
103
Landmark
Post Grid Nodes

Name
POST GRID NODES
Alternate Name GRID POSTING

Function
This process posts symbols at grid node locations, labels the grid nodes
with their respective grid values, or both.
Notes

Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
GRIDIN
C*24
MFDIN
SYMBOL
Symbol to post at grid nodes. A zero suppresses grid

symbol posting. Otherwise see Appendix C. Symbols,
Fonts, and Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference
manual for available symbols.
Default Value = 1, a cross
SYMBSIZE

SHOWZNON C*4
R2003.12.0

Name of the input grid file.
05

Default Value = 0
Symbol posted at ZNON locations indicator.

Default Value = POST
Options:
POST
= Post symbol at ZNON locations.
OMIT
= Do not post symbol at ZNON locations.
RMINWIN
Minimum row of the grid to display. This specifies the

bottom of the window.
Default Value = 1
RMAXWIN
Maximum row of the grid to display. This specifies the

top of the window.
Default Value = Last row of the grid
CMINWIN
Minimum column of the grid to display. This specifies the

left side of the window.
Default Value = 1
Process
104
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CMAXWIN
ANNOTATE C*4
R2003.12.0

Maximum column of the grid to display. This specifies
the right side of the window.
Default Value = Last column in the grid
Values posted at grid node locations indicator.
Options:
POST
= Post grid values
OMIT
= Do not post grid values
NDECIMAL
Number of digits to right of decimal of posted value. Used

if ANNOTATE = POST.
Default Value = 0
ROWRATE
Rate for labeling grid rows; 0 to label none. Used if

ANNOTATE = POST.
Default Value = 1
STARTROW
Row (of the window) to start labeling grid nodes. Used if

ANNOTATE = POST.
Note: STARTROW = 1 refers to the window subarray
and not to the row of the original grid. Rows are
counted from the upper left corner, increasing
downward.
Default Value = 1
COLRATE
Rate for labeling grid columns. A zero indicates that the

grid columns are not labeled; used if ANNOTATE =
POST.
Default Value = 1
STARTCOL
Column (of the window) at which to start labeling grid

nodes. Used if ANNOTATE = POST.
Note: STARTCOL = 1 refers to the first column of the
window subarray and not to the first column of the
original grid. Columns are counted from the upper
left corner, increasing to the right.
Default Value = 1
Process
105
Landmark
Post Lattice
Name
POST LATTICE
Alternate Name LATTICE POSTING

Function
This process posts a RESIN lattice on the current picture.
Notes

Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
LATTICE
C*24
MFDIN

Name of the lattice file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the lattice file.

Default Value = 0
Process
106
Landmark
Post Lease
Name
POST LEASE
Alternate Name LEASE POSTING

Function
This process places lease polygon boundaries, lease labels, and lease
annotation on a basemap. It requires two input files, one of which
holds the lease polygons and one of which holds the lease text and
annotation information.
Optionally, leases can be colorfilled with a single color, crosshatched,
or hachured across the entire lease or just around the edges. If there are
shared leases, percentage of ownership can be illustrated with different
colors or fill inside edge shaded polygons. For more detail on the
shared lease attributes, see the section on the LEASE DRAWING
macro in the Macro Reference Manual.
The line color for lease boundaries can be held constant, or it can be
determined by a color field on the input lease polygon file. Lease
annotation text color and text font are selected by the user. The color of
the shade lines, hachure lines, or lease edge border can be fixed or can
be determined by the first color field on the input lease identification
file. Colorfill indices for leases filled with single colors that vary from
lease to lease or with variable multiple color polygons are determined
by color field(s) following the first field on the text identification file.
If lease annotation is selected for each lease based entirely on
information in the lease text information file, only one exception exists
to the expectation that there are separate color fields on the input file to
control polygon colorfill and the color associated with cross-shading
lines, hachures, or edge-shading. The exception is if hachuring or
cross-shading options are chosen along with single color lease colorfill
and only one color field is on the input file. In this case the hachures or
shade lines index is set to 1 (white on the screen, changing to black on
paper). This exception is included so the algorithm is
backwards-compatible with text lease identification files created to run
with earlier versions of this module.
Notes
R2003.12.0
In a ZCL script, the PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a

graphics file and picture before this process is used. For a macro, the
picture should be the currently displayed picture.
Process
107
Landmark
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
VERTICES
C*24
MFDIN
TEXTIN
C*24
MFDTEXT
TEXTOUT
C*24
MFDOUT

Name of the input vertex file that contains the lease
boundaries.
This file should contain fields of type X, Y, Segment ID
and Area ID. It can optionally contain a color code field.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the vertex file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the input text file that contains the lease label
information.
This file should include text fields for posting on the lease
and it must contain an Area ID field. It can optionally
contain an area symbol code that controls the annotation
of individual leases. It can also contain one or more color
fields and multiple z fields to use with matching color
code field if HACHURE = EDGE SHADE FILL is
selected after one or more of the leases to post on the map.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the text file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the output text file to contain labels that do not
fit inside the area of the lease. This file is created if a label
does not fit.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output text file.

Default Value = 1
Process
108
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
HACHSRCE C*16

Method for guiding the lease hachuring and colorfill.
Note: See HACHURE for the values that should appear
in the field if HACHSRCE = HACHURE FIELD.
Default Value = HACHURE FIELD
Options:
HACHURE FIELD
= Field of type Area Symbol (49) in the

text file used to guide hachuring and
colorfill.
HACHURE VALUE = Use parameter HACHURE to guide
hachuring and colorfill.
COLRSRCE
C*12
Method for determining colorfill index for all lease

annotation options except if HACHURE =
EDGE SHADE NO FILL or EDGE SHADE FILL.
Default Value = COLOR FIELD
Options:
COLOR FIELD
COLOR VALUE
LBLNOFIT
C*20
= Use the color field in the text file to select

the color index. This should be the
second color field if lease hachures or
cross-shading lines are selected on a lease
basis.
= Use COLOR to select the colorfill index
for all leases.
Action to take if labels do not fit lease.

Default Value = REGULAR LABEL
Options:
REGULAR LABEL = Post only the last label in the LABELS
array, centered and extending beyond
lease boundary if it is too large.
REPLACEMENT
= Generate a two letter code (AA, AB, ...
LABEL
BA, BB, ...), place it on the map, place
all labels for that lease in file
TEXTOUT, and place the two letter
code in a new field in that same file.
R2003.12.0
Process
109
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
HACHURE
C*24

Type of hachuring and colorfilling.
Note: The corresponding value for the field referenced
by HACHURE FIELD is listed in parentheses.
This value is only used if HACHSRCE =
HACHURE FIELD. See HACHSRCE.
Default Value = NO HACHURE NO FILL
Options:
NO HACHURE NO FILL
= Only lease border and labels (value = 0)
UP HACHURE NO FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, hachure around edge
of lease polygon, no colorfill (value = 1)
DOWN HACHURE NO FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, hachure around
edge of lease polygon, no colorfill (value =
2)
UP SHADING NO FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill (value = 3)
DOWN SHADING NO FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, lines across entire
CROSS SHADING NO FILL
= 45 degree crosshatch lines across entire
UP HACHURE FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, hachure around edge
of lease polygon, with colorfill (value = 1)
DOWN HACHURE FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, hachure around
edge of lease polygon, with colorfill (value
= 2)
UP SHADING FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
lease, with colorfill (value = 3)
DOWN SHADING FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, lines across entire
lease, with colorfill (value = 4)
CROSS SHADING FILL
= 45 degree crosshatch lines, with colorfill
(value = 5)
FILL ONLY
= Only colorfill the lease area (value = 6)
EDGE SHADE NO FILL
= Border edge shading without multiple
colorfill (value = 7)
EDGE SHADE FILL
= Border edge shading with multiple colorfill
for shared lease attributes (value = 8)
R2003.12.0
Process
110
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
COLOR
0255 Color index for the color of colorfill or hachure lines.

Default Value = 1
NUMLABEL
010
LABELS
FONT
C*8
Number of text fields to label.

Default Value = 1
Array of up to 10 numbers of text fields that contain the
information to label on each lease.
Font for lease labels.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
LABLSIZE
LCLRSRCE
C*12
Array of up to 10 numbers indicating the size of the

posted label, in plotter units (in or cm), in the same
position as the corresponding field being labeled
(LABELS).
Source for the polygon line color.
Default Value = COLOR VALUE
Options:
COLOR FIELD = Use the color field on the lease text file
COLOR VALUE = Use the color value LNCOLOR
LNCOLOR
0255 Polygon line color value. Used if LCLRSRC = COLOR

VALUE.
Default Value = 1
LABELCLR
0255 Text color for all lease labels.

Default Value = 1
EDGESRCE
C*12
First source for the edge width color.

Default Value = COLOR FIELD
Options:
COLOR FIELD = Use the color field on the lease text file
COLOR VALUE = Use the color value EDGECLR
R2003.12.0
Process
111
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
EDGECLR
EDGEWDTH
DIVIDE

0255 Color of the hachure lines or color of the edge shading if
EDGESRCE = COLOR VALUE.
Default Value = 5
Width to use for lease edge shading or width between
lease hachures around the edge of the lease polygon.
Default Value = 0.1
C*8
Axis to use for subdividing polygons to show shared lease

attributes. Used if HACHURE = EDGE SHADE FILL.
Default Value = X-AXIS
Options:
X-AXIS
= Divide along the x axis
Y-AXIS
= Divide along the y axis
HALFEDGE C*4
Indicator for whether to halve the edge width to try to fit

smaller polygons. Used if HACHURE = EDGE SHADE
NO FILL or EDGE SHADE FILL.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO
R2003.12.0
= Attempt to fit shaded edges to smaller

polygons by halving the edge width
= Do not halve the edge width
Process
112
Landmark
Post Lines
Name
POST LINES
Alternate Name DRAW LINES

Function
This process draws lines taken either from a vertex file or from three
data blocks previously set using the DATA BLOCK Process.
Notes

Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
VERTICES
C*24

Name of the input vertex file. If the VERTICES
parameter is not supplied, data is assumed to come from
DATA BLOCKs (see DNUMX, DNUMY,
DNUMSYMB). Required if data is extracted from the
vertex file.
MFDIN
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input vertex file.

Default Value = 0
SYMBOL
Symbol that is posted at each vertex point. For examples,

see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in
the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = 0, no point is posted
SYMBSIZE

LINETYPE
C*12
Type of line connecting the points.

Default Value = SOLID
Options:
SOLID
= Normal line to connect points
DASHED
= Dashed line to connect points
BOLD
= Bold line to connect points
SOLID+HACH
= Normal line with hachure to connect

points
BOLD+HACH
= Bold line with hachure to connect

points
Process
113
Landmark
Parameter
Name
BOLDWIDE
DASHLEN
Length of the solid portion of a dashed line, in plotter

units (in or cm).
GAPLEN
CLOSEDIS
Length of the gap portion of a dashed line, in plotter units

(in or cm).
If the distance between the first and last points of the line
is less than this threshold value, the lines are closed (i.e.,
the last point is connected to the first point). The distance
is measured in engineering units.
Default Value = Diagonal of picture AOI
HACHGAP
Distance between successive hachure ticks on hachured

lines, in plotter units (in or cm).
HACHLEN
Length of the hachure ticks, in plotter units (in or cm).

HACHDIR
C*8
UNITS
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
C*12
28
Width of bold line in terms of normal line width.

Default Value = 2
Direction the hachure marks should print.

Default Value = RIGHT
Options:
RIGHT
= Hachures appear on the right relative to

direction along the line.
LEFT
= Hachures appear on left relative to direction

along the line.
Type of coordinate units.

Options:
PLOTTER
= Plotter units (in or cm)
USER
= Engineering or user coordinates
Process
114
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
COLOR
0255 Color index from the currently active color table.

Default Value = If lines are being drawn from a file, the
color of the type of lines (vertices or faults)
being drawn
or
13, otherwise
DNUMX
Use number of the input DATA BLOCK that contains the

x coordinates. Required if VERTICES is not specified.
DNUMY
Use number of the input DATA BLOCK that contains the

y coordinates. Required if VERTICES is not specified.
DNUMSYMB
Use number for the input DATA BLOCK that contains

the plot symbol for each of the x,y points.
If DNUMSYMB is zero, then all symbols are set to the
symbol code specified by SYMBOL, and no DATA
BLOCK is required. Required if VERTICES is not
specified.
Process
115
Landmark
Post NTS
Name
POST NTS
Alternate Name NTS POSTING

Function
This process posts National Topographic Survey (NTS) lines and

labels.
Notes

Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CLIPNTS
C*12

Use of DLS with NTS.
Default Value = NTS ONLY
Options:
NTS ONLY
= Plot NTS only
NTS CLIP DLS = Plot NTS clipped to DLS
SURVEY
LINELEVL
R2003.12.0
C*4
C*8
NTS survey type.

Default Value = NTS
Options:
NTS
= Plot true National Topographic Survey
PNGA
= Plot Petroleum & Natural Gas Act
Level or density of lines to draw.

For example, if LINELEVL = SERIES, then NTS, Map
and Series lines are drawn.
Default Value = NTS
Options:
NTS
= NTS line
MAP
= Map line
SERIES
= Series line
BLOCK
= Block line
UNIT
= Unit line
QUARTER
= Quarter line
Process
116
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LABLLEVL
C*8
LWLFLEVL C*8
NTSLINE
R2003.12.0
C*8

Level or density of labels to draw. LABLLEVL must be
less than or equal to LINELEVL in density.
Default Value = Density of lines, LINELEVL
Options:
NTS
= NTS number
MAP
= Map letter
SERIES
= Series number
BLOCK
= Block letter
UNIT
= Unit number
QUARTER
= Quarter letter
Level or density of label to draw in the lower left corner

of the map. LWLFLEVL must be less than or equal to
LABLLEVL in density.
Default Value = Density of labels, LABLLEVL
Options:
NONE
= Do not post this label
NTS
= NTS number
MAP
= Map letter
SERIES
= Series number
BLOCK
= Block letter
UNIT
= Unit number
QUARTER
= Quarter letter
Line type for the NTS lines.

Options:
PLAIN
= Draw normal NTS lines
DASHED
= Draw dashed NTS lines
BOLD
= Draw bold NTS lines
Process
117
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MAPLINE
C*8
SERSLINE
BLCKLINE
UNITLINE
QRTRLINE
R2003.12.0
C*8
C*8
C*8
C*8

Line type for the Map lines.
Options:
PLAIN
= Draw normal Map lines
DASHED
= Draw dashed Map lines
BOLD
= Draw bold Map lines
Line type for the Series lines.

Options:
PLAIN
= Draw normal Series lines
DASHED
= Draw dashed Series lines
BOLD
= Draw bold Series lines
Line type for the Block lines.

Options:
PLAIN
= Draw normal Block lines
DASHED
= Draw dashed Block lines
BOLD
= Draw bold Block lines
Line type for the Unit lines.

Options:
PLAIN
= Draw normal Unit lines
DASHED
= Draw dashed Unit lines
BOLD
= Draw bold Unit lines
Line type for the Quarter lines.

Options:
PLAIN
= Draw normal Quarter lines
DASHED
= Draw dashed Quarter lines
BOLD
= Draw bold Quarter lines
Process
118
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
NTSLABL
C*4
MAPLABL
SERSLABL
C*4
C*4
BLCKLABL C*4
UNITLABL
C*4
QRTRLABL C*4
R2003.12.0

Labeling of NTS lines.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label NTS lines
NO
= Do not label NTS lines
Labeling of Map lines.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label Map lines
NO
= Do not label Map lines
Labeling of Series lines.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label Series lines
NO
= Do not label Series lines
Labeling of Block lines.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label Block lines
NO
= Do not label Block lines
Labeling of Unit lines.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label Unit lines
NO
= Do not label Unit lines
Labeling of Quarter lines.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label Quarter lines
NO
= Do not label Quarter lines
Process
119
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LWLFLABL C*4
R2003.12.0
Labeling of lower left corner.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
= Label lower left corner
NO
= Do not label lower left corner
NTSCLR
0255 Color index for NTS lines.

Default Value = Default color from the color table
MAPCLR
0255 Color index for Map lines.

SERSCLR
0255 Color index for Series lines.

BLCKCLR
0255 Color index for Block lines.

UNITCLR
0255 Color index for Unit lines.

QRTRCLR
0255 Color index for Quarter lines.

NTSWGHT
18
Rate for drawing bold NTS lines.

Default Value = 2
MAPWGHT
18
Rate for drawing bold Map lines.

Default Value = 2
SERSWGHT
18
Rate for drawing bold Series lines.

Default Value = 2
BLCKWGHT
18
Rate for drawing bold Block lines.

Default Value = 2
UNITWGHT
18
Rate for drawing bold Unit lines.

Default Value = 2
QRTRWGHT
18
Rate for drawing bold Quarter lines.

Default Value = 2
NTSDASH
Length of dash for NTS lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if NTSLINE = DASHED.
Process
120
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MAPDASH
Length of dash for Map lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if MAPLINE = DASHED.
SERSDASH
Length of dash for Series lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if SERSLINE = DASHED.
BLCKDASH
Length of dash for Block lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if BLCKLINE = DASHED.
UNITDASH
Length of dash for Unit lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if UNITLINE = DASHED.
QRTRDASH
Length of dash for Quarter lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if QRTRLINE = DASHED.
NTSGAP
Length of gap for NTS lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if NTSLINE = DASHED.
MAPGAP
Length of gap for Map lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if MAPLINE = DASHED.
SERSGAP
Length of gap for Series lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if SERSLINE = DASHED.
BLCKGAP
Length of gap for Block lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if BLCKLINE = DASHED.
UNITGAP
Length of gap for Unit lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if UNITLINE = DASHED.
QRTRGAP
Length of gap for Quarter lines in plotter units (in or cm).

Used if QRTRLINE = DASHED.
Process
121
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
NTSFONT
C*8

Type font for NTS line labels.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
R2003.12.0
MAPFONT
C*8
Type font for Map line labels.

Options:
Same as NTSFONT
SERSFONT
C*8
Type font for Series line labels.

Options:
Same as NTSFONT
BLCKFONT C*8
Type font for Block line labels.

Options:
Same as NTSFONT
UNITFONT
Type font for Unit line labels.

Options:
Same as NTSFONT
C*8
QRTRFONT C*8
Type font for Quarter line labels.

Options:
Same as NTSFONT
LWLFONT
Type font for the lower left corner label.

Options:
Same as NTSFONT
C*8
Process
122
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
NTSHGHT
Label height for NTS line labels in plotter units. Used if

NTSLABL = YES.
Default Value = Based on map scale and the size of each
grid element
MAPHGHT
Label height for Map line labels in plotter units. Used if

MAPLABL = YES.
grid element
SERSHGHT
Label height for Series line labels in plotter units. Used if

SERSLABL = YES.
grid element
BLCKHGHT
Label height for Block line labels in plotter units. Used if

BLCKLABL = YES.
grid element
UNITHGHT
Label height for Unit line labels in plotter units. Used if

UNITLABL = YES.
grid element
QRTRHGHT
Label height for Quarter line labels in plotter units. Used

if QRTRLABL = YES.
grid element
LWLFHGHT
Label height for lower left corner label in plotter units.

Used if LWLFLABL = YES.
grid element
Process
123
Landmark
Post Seismic
Name
POST SEISMIC
Alternate Name SEISMIC POSTING

Function
This process posts seismic lines.
Notes
ZVALLOC and LABLLOC should have the same value, meaning that
both angles should be measured with respect to the same line.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DATAIN
C*24
Name of the posting file.
MFDIN
INFLD
POSTMODE C*20
05

Default Value = 0
Field number of the desired field in the data file.
Method for determining how shotpoints are posted.
Default Value = ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE
Options:
ALL POINTS
= All points
INTERVALS
= Compute posting interval such that

successive posted points are at least
POSTDIST apart
TRACKLINE
= Trackline (a line that connects

shotpoints) only, post no symbols
ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE
= Endpoints plus every POSTRATEth
point on the file, beginning with the
point number POSTADD
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE
= Endpoints plus every point for which
the shotpoint number plus POSTADD
is evenly divisible by POSTRATE
R2003.12.0
Process
124
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SYMBOL
Symbol code. See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line

Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference manual for
available symbols.
Default Value = 14, a circle
SYMBSIZE

POSTRATE
Point-posting frequency; every POSTERATEth point is

posted.
Default Value = 2
POSTADD
After the starting endpoint, begin with the POSTADDth

point from the starting point.
Default Value = 1
POSTDIST
Minimum distance between posted points, in plotter units

(in or cm).
LABLMODE C*20
Shotpoint label selection mode.

Default Value = ENDPOINTS+LABLRATE
Options:
NO LABELS
= No labels are posted
ALL POINTS
= All points
INTERVALS
= Compute posting interval such that

successive labeled points are separated
by at least LABLDIST
ENDPOINTS+LABLRATE
= Both endpoints plus every
LABLRATEth point on the file, starting
with point LABLADD
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE
= Both endpoints plus every point for
which the shotpoint number plus
LABLADD becomes evenly divisible
by LABLRATE
R2003.12.0
Process
125
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LABLLOC
C*20
LABLRATE
LABLADD
LABLDIST

Location of labels.
Default Value = LEFT+ABOVE+LINE
Options:
LEFT+ABOVE+X-AXIS
= Left of the line (above for a

horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to x
axis
RIGHT+BELOW+X-AXI
S
= Right of the line (below for

a horizontal line) where
axis
RIGHT+BELOW+LINE

ANGLE is with respect to
line
LEFT+ABOVE+LINE

line
Shotpoint labeling frequency; every LABLRATEth

posted point is labeled.
Default Value = 2
After the starting endpoint, begin labeling shotpoints with
the LABLADDth point from the starting point.
Default Value = 0
Distance between posted labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Process
126
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZVALMODE C*20

Selection method for z value labels.
Default Value = NO LABELS
Options:
ALL POINTS
= All z values labeled
NO LABELS
= No z value labels
SHOTPOINT
= Post z value labels if shotpoint labels are

posted
ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE
The endpoints plus every ZVALRATEth z
value are labeled, beginning with points
ZVALADD
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE
= Endpoints plus every point for which the
shotpoint number plus ZVALADD is
evenly divisible by ZVALRATE
ZVALLOC
R2003.12.0
C*20
The z value posting position.

Default Value = RIGHT+BELOW+LINE
Options:
LEFT+ABOVE+X-AXIS

axis
RIGHT+BELOW+X-AXI
S

axis
RIGHT+BELOW+LINE

line
LEFT+ABOVE+LINE

line
Process
127
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZVALRATE
The z value posting frequency. ZVALRATE must be

greater than zero if ZVALMODE =
ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE or
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE.
Default Value = 0
ZVALADD
LABLSIZE
After the starting endpoint, begin posting the z value with

the ZVALADDth point from the starting point.
Default Value = 0
Height of shotpoint and z value labels, in plotter units
(in or cm).
ANGLE
0.0
180.0
degrees
Angle of shotpoint and z value annotation, in degrees.

NDECIMAL
Number of digits to right of decimal of posted value.

Default Value = 0
ZBIAS
Bias the z value by ZBIAS before posting.

Default Value = 0.0
ZSCALE
Multiply the z value by ZSCALE before posting.

Default Value = 1.0
NAMELOC
C*12
Location for posting the seismic line name.

Default Value = BOTH+LINE
Options:
BOTH+LINE
= Both endpoints and NAMEANGL is

with respect to line
START+LINE
= Starting endpoint only and

NAMEANGL is with respect to line
END+LINE
= ENding endpoint only and

NAMEANGL is with respect to line
BOTH+X-AXI
S
= Both endpoints and NAMEANGL is

with respect to x axis
START+X-AXI = Starting endpoint only and

S
NAMEANGL is with respect to x axis
END+X-AXIS
R2003.12.0
= Ending endpoint only and

NAMEANGL is with respect to x axis
Process
128
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
NAMESIZE
NAMEANGL
LINETYPE
Height of line name, in plotter units (in or cm).

0.0
Angle of line name, in degrees.
180.0 Default Value = 0.0 degrees
degrees
C*8
Type of trackline, i.e., the type of line connecting

consecutive points in the same seismic line.
Default Value = SOLID
Options:
NONE
= No trackline
SOLID
= Normal trackline
DASHED
= Dashed trackline
BOLD
= Bold trackline
DASHLEN
Dash length along trackline, in plotter units (in or cm).

ZNON
Null data value for the field being posted.

NEWOLD
POSTIN
POSTOUT
MFDPST
R2003.12.0
C*4
Whether the posted line list file is new or old.

Default Value = NEW
Options:
NEW
= File is new and is given by POSTOUT
OLD
= File is old and is given by POSTIN
C*24
Name of input posted line list file.

The file must be of type LPST. This file has a list of all
lines on the input data file, their location and a flag for if
they have been posted or not. Required if NEWOLD =
OLD.
C*24
Name of the output posted line list file. This file is created
if NEWOLD = NEW.
Default Value = LINE LOCATION FILE
05
Number of the MFD that contains the posted line list file
for input or output depending on the value of NEWOLD.
Default Value = 0
Process
129
Landmark
Parameter
Name
LINEIN
MFDLIN
SELECT
FONT
Data
Type
C*24
I
C*8
C*8
Name of the file that contains the list of line names to

post. Required if SELECT = ONLY.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the list of line names

file.
Default Value = 0
Method for selecting which lines to post.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL
= Post all lines. If NEWOLD = OLD, post

all lines not previously posted.
ONLY
= Post only those lines included by the list

in LINEIN. If NEWOLD = OLD, post
only selected lines that have not been
posted.
EXCEPT
= Post only the lines excluded by the list in

LINEIN.
Type font to use. See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and

Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference manual for
examples of font types.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
R2003.12.0
SYMFLD
Field number for symbol code field to use for symbol to

post. Used if PSTSYM = SYMBOL FIELD.
CLRFLD
Field number for color field to use for color of symbol.

Used if CLRMODE = COLOR FIELD.
ZCLRFLD
Field number for z field to use for determining color.

Required if CLRMODE = Z-FIELD.
Process
130
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SYMCLR
ZCLRINC
CLRLEV
150
STRTCOLR
0255 Color index for first color to use if CLRMODE =

Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56
CLRMODE
C*12
PSTSYM
R2003.12.0
C*16

0255 Color index for symbol color table. Used if CLRMODE =
SYMBOL COLOR.
Default Value = 20
Options:
0 = value in color table
1255 = color index to use
Increment for color change based on z field. Required if
CLRMODE = Z-FIELD and CLRTABLE =
INCREMENT.
Number of color levels to use when varying color based
on z field. Required if CLRMODE= Z-FIELD and
CLRTABLE = TYPE IN or DIVISIONS.
Method for determining how the color for the symbols is

obtained.
Default Value = SYMBOL COLOR
Options:
SYMBOL
COLOR
= All symbols are the color given by

parameter SYMCLR
COLOR FIELD
= Color of each symbol is given by the

value of the field specified by
CLRFLD
Z-FIELD
= Color of each symbol is determined

by the value of the field specified by
ZCLRFLD
Method for determining how the symbols to post at each

points location are obtained.
Default Value = SYMBOL NUMBER
Options:
SYMBOL
NUMBER
= Use symbol number given by

SYMBOL
SYMBOL FIELD
= Use symbol code field given by

SYMFLD
OMIT
= Do not post a symbol
Process
131
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CLRTABLE
C*12

Method for determining how the Z Range color table is
defaulted. Needed if CLRMODE = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = DIVISIONS
Options:
TYPE IN
= Do not default the table values.
DIVISIONS
= Divide the z field range into

CLRLEV equal divisions. Table
starts with minimum z value.
INCREMENT
= Start the table with the nearest

multiple of ZCLRINC that is less
than the minimum z value. Each
level is incremented by ZCLRINC
until maximum z value is exceeded
or the length of the table is reached.
ZCLRS
Array of up to 50 z values for color indices to use when

posting symbols. Used if CLRMODE = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = If the z value is less than ZCLRS color,
STRTCOLR is used
or
If the z value is greater than ZCLRS and less
than ZCLRS2, then STRTCOLR + 1 is used
and so forth until the end of the table is reached
LBLCLR
0255 Color index for labels.

Default Value = 20
Options:
0, value in color table
Otherwise, color index to use
LINEWGHT
18
CREATPST
C*16
Bold line width factor as a multiple of plain line widths.

Default Value = 2
Whether to create and post the output posted line list file
POSTOUT or to create POSTOUT without posting the
seismic lines.
Default Value = POST
Options:
POST
= Create POSTOUT and post seismic lines.
CREATE NO POST
= Create POSTOUT but do not post seismic
lines. Valid only if NEWOLD = NEW
R2003.12.0
Process
132
Landmark
Post Seismic New

Name
POST SEISMIC NEW
Alternate Name SEISMIC POST NEW

Function
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
MFDIN
This new seismic posting process offers additional capabilities for

posting seismic line data beyond those in the POST SEISMIC Process.
This process posts both 2D and 3D seismic survey data, allowing line,
shotpoint, symbol and label decimation, as well as control over the
size, color and font of shotpoint symbols and all labels. This process
also provides methods of indicating discontinuities (unconformities)
along seismic lines.
Data
Type
C*24
I
POSTMODE C*4
Name of the input seismic file (2D or 3D).

05

Default Value = 0
Mode for posting lines/surveys.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL
= All data is posted
SOME
= Only lines/surveys that pass the selection

criterion (see parameter SLCTOPER) are
posted
WLDMULTI C*1
Wildcard character that matches zero or more characters.

Used to specify masks for text fields for line identification
(parameters SLTXTAS & SLTXTBS).
Default Value = * (asterisk)
WLDSINGL
Wildcard character that matches exactly one character.

Used to specify masks for text fields for line identification
(parameters SLTXTAS & SLTXTBS).
Default Value = % (percent)
SLCTFLD
R2003.12.0
C*1
Number of the field in the input file to use for selection

purposes. If the input file is 2D seismic, then the select
field can be type Line Name or Seismic Line Number. If
the input file is 3D seismic, then the select field must be
type 3D Survey Name. Used only if POSTMODE =
SOME.
Default Value = Primary sort field index
Process
133
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DISCFLD
DISCONTS

Field number of the Discontinuity Code field in the input
file. Used only if DISCONTS = YES.
Default Value = First field of correct type on the input file
C*4
DISCSIZE
DISCPATT
Use of discontinuity fields.

Default Value = NO
Options:
NO
= Ignore discontinuity fields
YES
= Use the discontinuity field specified by

DISCFLD
Scale value of the posted shotpoint symbol size if the

shotpoint falls in a discontinuity. Used only if
DISCONTS = YES.
Default Value = 1.0
1
Track line pattern for segments of a seismic line that fall
through in a discontinuity. Used only if DISCONTS = YES.
20
Default Value = 1
Options:
1
0
= Same pattern as track line

= No track line
<0 = Use the line pattern specified (see Appendix C.

Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in the Z-MAP
Plus Reference manual for examples)
ZRNGMODE C*12
Mode for creation of Z Range table. This table is used

only if SYMSZMOD or COLORMOD = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = TYPE IN
Options:
TYPE IN
= Up to 50 values are supplied by

ZRNGTABL
DIVIDE
= Divide the modulation range into number

of levels specified by NUMZRNGS
INC
= Each level of the table starting with the

data file minimum value is increased by
ZRNGINCM
INC+START
R2003.12.0
= Each level of the table starting with

value of ZRNGSTRT is increased
by ZRNGINCM
Process
134
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
ZRNGTABL
Array of up to 50 z range values for building the Z Range

table used for modulating colors and sizes. Used only if
ZRNGMODE = TYPE IN and either COLORMOD or
SYMSZMOD = Z-FIELD.
ZRNGINCM
Increment by which each level of the Z Range table is

increased.Used if ZRNGMODE = INC or INC+START.
Default Value = 1.0
ZRNGSTRT
NUMZRNGS
Value at which to start incrementing the z values in the

Z Range table. Used if ZRNGMODE = INC+START.
Default Value = Minimum z data value
Number of Z Range levels to create in or use from
ZRNGTABL or SIZETABL.
If ZRNGMODE or SIZETMOD = TYPE IN, then this
value is the number of entries in ZRNGTABL or
SIZETABL. Otherwise it is the desired length of the
table.
If the tables are computed, then the resulting size of the
tables overrides the size specified by NUMZRNGS.
Used if varying color or size based on a z field, i.e.,
SIZETMOD or COLORMOD = Z-FIELD, and if the
modulating field MODULFLD is used.
Default Value = 50
MODULFLD
Field number of the modulation field in the input file.

Field can be any numeric field. Used if varying color or
size based on a z field, i.e., SIZETMOD or COLORMOD
= Z-FIELD.
COLORFLD
Field number of a color field in the input file to use for

track lines, shotpoint symbols, shotpoint labels, and
attribute labels. Must be field type Color. Used if
COLORMOD = FIELD.
150
Process
135
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
COLORMOD C*8
COLORSTR
SIZETMOD
C*12

Color mode for defining color of track lines, shotpoint
symbols, shotpoint labels, and attribute labels.
Options:
VALUE
= Color value specific to the matched

selection criterion (see SYMCLR &
LBLCLR)
FIELD
= Color field specified by COLORFLD
Z-FIELD
= A z field specified by MODULFLD is used

to look up the color of the symbol in the Z
Range color table
Starting color index for modulated colors. Used to build a

Z Range color table to vary color by z field if
COLORMOD = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 1
Mode used for creating a Z Range size table. The size
table is set up if any posted items rely on a modulated
size.
Default Value = TYPE IN
Options:
TYPE IN
= Up to 50 values are supplied by SIZETABL
DIVIDE
= Divide the modulation range into number of

levels specified by NUMZRNGS
INC

SIZETMIN is increased by SIZETINC
INC+START
R2003.12.0

SIZETSTR is increased by SIZETINC
SIZETABL
Array of up to 50 size values used when modulating sizes,

in the same position as the corresponding z range in
ZRNGTABL. Used only if SIZETMOD = TYPE IN or
SYMSZMOD = Z-FIELD.
SIZETINC
Size table increment. Used to construct the size table only

if SIZETMOD = DIVIDE, INC, or INC+START.
Default Value = (SIZETMAX SIZETMIN) /
NUMZRNGS
Process
136
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MNSIZTBV
Size assigned if the z value falls below the minimum

Z Range table value. Used only if SYMSZMOD =
Z-FIELD.
Note: In effect, this value always becomes the first entry
in the size table.
Default Value = 0.1
SIZETSTR
Start value of the Z Range size table. Used only if

SIZETMOD = INC+START.
Default Value = 0.1
SIZETMIN
Minimum value of the range of sizes to calculate for

constructing the Z Range size table. Used only if
SIZETMOD = DIVIDE or INC.
Default Value = 0.1
SIZETMAX
Maximum value of the range of sizes to calculate for

constituting the Z Range size table. Used only if
SIZETMOD = DIVIDE, INC, or INC+START.
Default Value = 0.1
POSTDIST
Minimum allowable plotter distance between data points,

in plotter units. Value of zero disables usage.
This parameter prevents label overposting. If enabled, this
parameter is in effect at all times, even if all points are
posted.
C*4
Repositioning of line names when the line endpoints are

clipped to the edge of the area of interest (AOI), and of
3D survey names when the computed position of the label
falls partially or totally outside the AOI.
Default Value = NO
Options:
INSIDE
R2003.12.0
NO
= Do not attempt to reposition.
YES
= Line names: Post the line name immediately

outside the border.
= 3D survey names: First any add-on label
specified by 3DANGLE is removed. Secondly,
an attempt is made to move the label back inside
the border AOI.
3DSIZFLD
Field number of a Text Size field in the input file to use

for 3D survey names. Must be field type Text Size.
3DCLRFLD
Field number of a Color field in the input file to use for

the 3D survey names. Must be field type Color.
Process
137
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
3DFNTFLD
3DLOCATE
C*12
3DFONT
C*8

Field number of a Text Font field to use for 3D survey
names. Must be field type Text Font.
Location of posted 3D survey names.
Default Value = BOTH+LINE
Options:
BOTH+LINE
= Combines START+LINE and

END+LINE as described below
START+LINE
= Parallel and above the first line in the

survey
END+LINE
= Parallel and below the last line in the

survey
BOTH+SHOT
= Combines START+SHOT and

END+SHOT as described below
START+SHOT
= Post at the beginning of the seismic

lines perpendicular to the line
END+SHOT
= Post at the end of the seismic lines

perpendicular to the lines
CENTER
= Post in the center of the survey
OMIT
= Do not post 3D survey names
Font for posting 3D survey name. Used only if

3DFNTFLD is zero.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
R2003.12.0
Process
138
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
3DTKMODE C*8
3DLNMODE C*8
LNLOCATE C*8
R2003.12.0

3D track line posting mode.
Default Value = RATE
Options:
RATE
= Post the first, last, and each 3DTKRATEth

track line starting with 3DTKSTRT
ALL
= Post all track lines in the 3D seismic survey
DIVIDE
= Post the first, last, and each track number

which plus a bias (ATTBIAS) is evenly
divisible by 3DTKRATE
NONE
= Post no 3D track lines
3D line name posting mode.

Options:
RATE
= Post the first, last, and each 3DLNRATEth

3D line name starting with 3DLNSTRT
ALL
= Post all line names in the 3D seismic survey
DIVIDE
= Post the first, last, and each 3D line number

evenly divisible by 3DLNSTRT value
NONE
= Post no 3D line names
Line name location mode.

Default Value = BOTH
Options:
BOTH
= Post the line name at both ends of the line
START
= Post the line name at the beginning of the

line
END
= Post the line name at the end of the line
NORTH
= Post the line name at the north side of the

line
SOUTH
= Post the line name at the south side of the

line
EAST
= Post the line name at the east side of the line
WEST
= Post the line name at the west side of the

line
OMIT
= Do not post line names
Process
139
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LNORIENT
C*8
Line name orientation.

Default Value = LINE
Options:
LINE
= Line name label parallel to the track line
X-AXIS
= Line name label parallel to the x axis
LNSIZFLD
Field number of a text size field in the input file to use for
line names. Must be field type Text Size.
LNCLRFLD
Field number of a color field in the input file to use for

line names. Must be field type Color.
LNFNTFLD
Field number of a font field in the input file to use for line
names. Must be field type Text Font.
LNFONT
C*8
TKCONNCT C*8
R2003.12.0
Font type for posted line name. Used only if LNFNTFLD

is zero.
Options:
PLAIN
= Z-MAP Plus plain
SIMPLEX
= Roman simplex
COMPLEX
= Roman complex
ITALIC
= Italics
DUPLEX
= Duplex
Which points in a seismic line to use when posting the

track line.
Default Value = POSTED
Options:
POSTED
= Track line drawn using only the points

posted with shotpoint symbols
ALL
= Track line drawn using all the points in the

dataset for that seismic line
Process
140
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TKPATFLD

Field number of a line pattern number field in the input
file to use for track lines. Must be field type Line Pattern
Number.
Options:
0
<0
= Use line pattern specified by TKPATFLD field
TKWGTFLD
Field number of a line weight field in the input file to use

for track lines. Must be field type Line Weight.
RESHTFLD
Field number of a shotpoint reshot field in the input file.

Must be field type Reshot Character.
Default Value = First field of correct type
SYMSZFLD
Field number of a symbol size field in the input file to use

for size of posted shotpoint symbols. Used if
SYMSZMOD = FIELD. Must be field type Symbol Size.
Default Value = First field of correct type
SYMCDFLD
Field number of a symbol code field in the input file to

use for posting shotpoint symbols. Must be field type
Symbol Code.
Default Value = 0
Options:
SYMSZMOD C*8
R2003.12.0
= Use line pattern defined by TKPATTRN

(page 146)
= Use values defined by SYMBOL (page 146)
<0
= Use symbol specified by SYMCDFLD field
Shotpoint symbol size mode.

Options:
VALUE
= A size value specific to the matched selection

criteria is used
FIELD
= Get the size of the symbol from a field (see

SYMSZFLD)
Z-FIELD
= A field in the data specified by SYMSZFLD

is used to look up the size of the symbol from
a table (see MODULFLD)
Process
141
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SYMPSTMD C*8
SYMLABMD C*8
R2003.12.0

Shotpoint symbol posting mode.
Note: If DISCONTS = YES, then each shotpoint at a
discontinuity is also posted.
Options:
RATE
= Post the shotpoints at the endpoints of the

line, and each POSTRATEth shotpoint
starting with the POSTADDth shotpoint
ALL
= Post all shotpoints
DIVIDE
= Post the shotpoint numbers at the

endpoints of the seismic line, and each
shotpoint number where shotpoint
number plus POSTADD is evenly
divisible by POSTRATE
INTERVAL
= Post each shotpoint that is at least

POSTRATE distance from the previous
shotpoint
NONE
= Post no shotpoint symbols
Shotpoint label posting mode.

Options:
RATE
= Post the shotpoints numbers at the

endpoints of the line, and each
LABLRATEth shotpoint number starting
with the LABLADDth shotpoint number
ALL
= Post a shotpoint number at each posted

shotpoint symbol
DIVIDE
= Post the shotpoint numbers at the

endpoints of the seismic line and each
shotpoint number where shotpoint number
plus LABLADD is evenly divisible by
LABLRATE
INTERVAL
= Post each shotpoint label that is at least

LABLRATE distance from the previous
shotpoint label
NONE
= Post no shotpoint labels
Process
142
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ATTBFLD
Field number of an attribute field in the input file to post

labels for. May be any numeric field. In order for
attributes to be posted, this value must be defined and
ATTBMODE must not equal NONE.
ATTNDECM
Number of decimal places to the right of the decimal

point in the posted attribute label.
Default Value = 0
ATTBIAS
Value to add to the attribute value prior to posting.

Default Value = 0.0
ATTSCALE
Value for multiplying the attribute value prior to posting.

Default Value = 1.0
Attribute posting mode.
Note: If DISCONTS = YES, then each shotpoint at a
discontinuity is also posted.
Options:
ATTBMODE C*8
R2003.12.0
NONE
= No attribute labels are posted
RATE
= Post the attribute labels at the endpoints

of the line, and each ATTBRATEth
attribute label starting with the
ATTBADDth attribute label
ALL
= Post an attribute label at each posted

shotpoint symbol
DIVIDE
= Post the attribute labels at the endpoints of

the seismic line, and each attribute label
where shotpoint number plus ATTBADD
is evenly divisible by ATTBRATE
INTERVAL
= Post each attribute label that is at least

ATTBRATE distance from the previous
attribute label
Process
143
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SLCTOPER
C*8

Array of up to 20 comparison operations. Used only if
POSTMODE = SOME.
Default Value = EQ
Options:
EQ
= Post the lines/surveys equal to SLTXTAS or

SLVALAS
NE
= Post the lines/surveys not equal to SLTXTA or

SLVALAS
LT
= Post the lines/surveys less than SLTXTAS or

SLVALAS
LE
= Post the lines/surveys less than or equal to

SLTXTAS or SLVALAS
GT
= Post the lines/surveys greater than SLTXTAS

or SLVALAS
GE
= Post the lines/surveys greater than or equal to

SLTXTAS or SLVALAS
NULL
= Post the lines/surveys equal to the null value of

the selected field
NOTNULL
= Post the lines/surveys not equal to the null

value of the selected field
BETWEEN
= Post the lines/surveys between the interval

bounded by SLTXTAS and SLTXTBS or
SLVALAS and SLVALBS
OUTSIDE
= Post the lines/surveys between the interval

bounded by SLTXTAS and SLTXTBS or
SLVALAS and SLVALBS
SLTXTAS
C*80
Array of up to 20 primary text masks for line

identification.
SLTXTBS
C*80
Array of up to 20 secondary text masks for line

identification.
SLVALAS
Array of up to 20 primary numeric masks for line

identification.
SLVALBS
Array of up to 20 secondary numeric masks for line

identification.
SYMCLR
0255 Array of up to 20 color indices used for track lines and

shotpoint symbols.
Default Value = 20
Process
144
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
LBLCLR
0255 Array of up to 20 color indices used for shotpoint and

attribute labels.
Default Value = 20
3DNMSIZE
3DNMCLR
3DANGLE
Array of up to 20 counterclockwise angles in degrees to

add to the 3D survey name label to post.
Default Value = 0.0
3DTKRATE
Array of up to 20 integers used to define the 3D track line

rate. Used if 3DTKMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2
3DTKSTRT
Array of up to 20 integers used to define the 3D track line

starting point. Used if 3DTKMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 0
3DLNRATE
Array of up to 20 integers used to define the 3D line name

rate. Used if 3DLNMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2
3DLNSTRT
Array of up to 20 integers used to define the 3D line name

starting point. Used if 3DLNMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 0
NAMESIZE
Array of up to 20 size labels used to define the size of the

line name label to post. Used only if LNSIZFLD = 0.
Default Value = 0.1
LNCOLOR
LNANGLE
Array of up to 20 label sizes for the 3D survey names to

post. Used only if 3DSIZFLD = 0.
Default Value = 0.1
0255 Array of up to 20 color indices of the 3D survey name
label to post. Used only if LNCLRFLD = 0.
Default Value = 20
0255 Array of up to 20 color indices to use for the line name

label. Used only if LNCLRFLD = 0.
Default Value = 20
Options:
0 = Value in color table
1-255 = Color index number to use
add to the line name label before posting.
Default Value = 0.0
Process
145
Landmark
Parameter
Name
TKPATTRN
Data
Type
I

020
Array of up to 20 pattern values assigned to posted track

lines. Used only if TKPATFLD = 0.
Default Value = 1
Options:
0
120
R2003.12.0
= No track line
= Use pattern specified. (For examples, see
Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.)
TKWEIGHT
Array of up to 20 weight values assigned to posted track

lines. Used only if TKWGTFLD = 0.
Default Value = 2
NUMBRBRK
Array of up to 20 numbers to compare against the

difference between two consecutive shotpoint numbers. If
the difference is greater than NUMBRBRK, then the track
line is broken. A value of zero disables usage.
Default Value = 0
DISTBRK
Array of up to 20 numbers to compare against the

distance between two consecutive shotpoint numbers. If
DISTBRK is greater than this distance, then the track line
is broken. A value of zero disables usage.
Default Value = 0.0
SYMBSIZE
Array of up to 20 shotpoint symbol sizes to post. Used

only if SYMSZMOD = VALUE.
SYMBOL
Array of up to 20 symbol codes to post. Used only if

SYMCDFLD = 0.
Default Value = 14
POSTRATE
Array of up to 20 shotpoint symbol posting rates. Used

only if SYMPSTMD = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2
POSTADD
Array of up to 20 shotpoint symbol posting starting

points. Used only if SYMPSTMD = DIVIDE or RATE.
Default Value = 1
LABLSIZE
Array of up to 20 shotpoint label sizes to post.

Default Value = 0.1
Process
146
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
LABLANGL

add to the shotpoint label to post.
Default Value = 0.0
LABLRATE
Array of up to 20 shotpoint label rates. Used only if

SYMLABMD = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2
LABLADD
Array of up to 20 shotpoint label starting points. Used

only if SYMLABMD = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 0
ATTBSIZE
Array of up to 20 attribute label sizes to post.

Default Value = 0.1
ATTANGLE

add to the attribute label before posting.
Default Value = 0.0
ATTBRATE
Array of up to 20 attribute labeling rates. Used only if

ATTBMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2
ATTBADD
Array of up to 20 attribute label starting points. Used only

if ATTBMODE = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 0
Process
147
Landmark
Post Star Symbol

Name
POST STAR SYMBOL
Alternate Name STAR SYMBOL POST

Function
This process posts star symbols, where the length of each spoke of the
star depends on a field value.
Example
Spoke size calculation for first field where NUMCLASS(1) = 4

(numbers in parentheses are the array element positions):
Field Value
Length of Spoke
< MINVALS(1)
No spoke is drawn
MINVALS(1) and < CLSLMT1S(1)
LENMINS(1)
CLSLMT1S(1) and < CLSLMT1S(2)
LENMINS(1) + LENINC
CLSLMT1S(2) and < CLSLMT1S(3)
LENMINS(1) + 2*LENINC
CLSLMT1S(3)
LENMINS(1) + 3*LENINC
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
C*24
Name of the input file. File must have x and y fields.
MFDIN
XFLD

YFLD

SYMBSIZE
Height of the symbol without any spokes, in plotter units

(in or cm). The symbol is a circle.
LENINC
Size for incrementing the length of the spokes, in plotter

units (in or cm).
NUMSPOKE
POSTFLDS
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
05
18

Default Value = 0
Number of spokes for the star.

Default Value = 1
Array of up to 8 numbers of fields to post, one for each
spoke.
Process
148
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
ZNONS
Array of up to 8 null values, in same position as

corresponding field to post in POSTFLDS.
Default Value = Null value for field
NUMCLASS
LENMINS
Array of up to 8 minimum spoke lengths, in plotter units

(in or cm), one for each spoke.
MINVALS
Array of up to 8 minimum values to post, in the same

position as the corresponding field listed in POSTFLDS.
If a field value is less than this value a spoke is not drawn
for the field.
Default Value = Minimum value for the field
CLSLMT1S

for the first spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a nice number
CLSLMT2S

for the second spoke, one for each class.
CLSLMT3S

for the third spoke, one for each class.
CLSLMT4S

for the fourth spoke, one for each class.
CLSLMT5S

for the fifth spoke, one for each class.
16
Array of up to 8 entries of class divisions, one for each

spoke.
Default Value = 2
Process
149
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CLSLMT6S

for the sixth spoke, one for each class.
CLSLMT7S

for the seventh spoke, one for each class.
CLSLMT8S

for the eighth spoke, one for each class.
LOCATION
C*12
Location of the legend.

Options:
LOWER LEFT = Place legend in lower left corner, in y
offset area
R2003.12.0
LOWER
RIGHT
= Place legend in lower right corner, in y

offset area
ARBITRARY
= The lower left corner of the legend is

specified by XLOWLEFT &
YLOWLEFT
OMIT
= Do not plot legend
XLOWLEFT
The x position of lower left corner of the legend, in plotter

units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION = ARBITRARY.
Default Value = 1. in or 2.5 cm
YLOWLEFT
The y position of lower left corner of the legend, in plotter

units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION = ARBITRARY.
Default Value = 1. in or 2.5 cm
Process
150
Landmark
Post Text
Name
POST TEXT
Alternate Name P TEXT

Function
This process posts text data from a text file on an MFD to the current
picture.
Notes
The PICTURE Process must be called to create or open a graphics file

and picture before this process is called.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
DATAIN
C*24
Name of the input posting file.
MFDIN
XFLD
Field number of the x field for text in the input file.

YFLD
Field number of the y field for text in the input file.

TEXTFLD
Field number of the Text field to post.

Default Value = First Text field
FONTFLD
Field number of the Font field in the input file. If not

specified, font is determined by FONT parameter.
Default Value = 0
LOCFLD
Field number of the Text Locmod (Location Mode) field

in the input file. If not specified, location is determined by
LOCATE parameter.
Default Value = 0
SIZEFLD
Field number of the Text Size field in the input file. If not
specified, size is determined by CHARSIZE parameter.
Default Value = 0
ROTFLD
Field number of the Text Angle field in the input file. If

not specified, angle is determined by ROTATE
parameter.
Default Value = 0
05

Default Value = 0
Process
151
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FONT
C*8

Font for posted text.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
LOCATE
C*12
Location of text relative to x,y position defined by XFLD

and YFLD.
Options:
LOWER LEFT = Place lower left corner of text at x,y
position
UNITS
R2003.12.0
C*12
CHARSIZE
ROTATE
FACTOR
COLOR
LOWER
RIGHT
= Place lower right corner of text at x,y

position
CENTER
= Place bottom center of text at x,y

position
Units to use for the x and y data in the file.

Default Value = SCALED
Options:
SCALED
= Map units
UNSCALED
= Plotter units
NORMALIZED
= Normalized
Height of characters, in plotter units (in or cm).

0.0
360.0
Orientation of text with respect to the horizontal (positive

x axis), measured counterclockwise in degrees.
Scaling factor for character size.
Default Value = 1.0
0255 Color index for posting the text.

Default Value = 12
Process
152
Landmark
Projection
Name
PROJECTION
Alternate Name PROJ

Function
This process defines the projection parameters for a new picture.

The projection is in effect until one of the following is encountered:
Notes
R2003.12.0
the PROJECTION END command

another PROJECTION command
the STOP command
See the table on the next page of this process for parameters and
projection types. Also, see the PROJECTION END Process.
Process
153
Landmark
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
PROJCODE
C*32

Cartographic projection.
Default Value = UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE
MERCATOR
Options:
ALBERS EQUAL AREA
AMERICAN POLYCONIC
AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL
CASSINI-SOLDNER
SINGLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
DOUBLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
MODIFIED POLYCONIC
NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID
GENERAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
OBLIQUE MERCATOR
STANDARD MERCATOR
UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
VAN DER GRINTEN I
New Zealand Map Grid

Van Der Grinten I
Modified Polyconic
Double Parallel Lambert

General Transverse Mercator
Oblique Mercator
Standard Mercator
Universal Transverse Mercator
American Polyconic
Azimuthal Gnomonic
Azimuthal Orthographic
Azimuthal Stereographic
Bipolar Oblique Conic Conformal
Cassini-Soldner
Single Parallel Lambert
Parameters
Albers Equal Area
Projection Type
Names
Description (Z-MAP Plus option)
PROJCODE
Projection Code
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y
SPHEROID
Spheroid Code
Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y N Y
R2003.12.0
Process
154
Landmark
UTMZONE
UTM Zone
N N N N N N N N N N N N O
N N N
HEMISPHR
Hemisphere
N N N N N N N N N N N N O
N N N
UNITCODE
Units Code
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Y N Y
UNITFACT
Unit Factor if IUNCOD = 1*
O O O O O O O O O O O O N
O N O
BOTTOM
Least Standard Parallel
Y N N N N N N Y Y N N N N
N N N
TOP
Greatest Standard Parallel
Y N N N N N N N Y N N N N
N N N
REFLAT
Reference Latitude
Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y N N
Y N N
LATSCALE
Latitude Scale Factor
N N N N N N N N N N N N N
Y N N
REFLONG
Reference Longitude
Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y O
Y N Y
LONSCALE
Longitude Scale Factor
N N N N N N N N N Y N N N
Y N N
FALNORTH
False Northing
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O N O
FALEAST
False Easting
O O O O O O N O O O O O N
O O O
SEMIMAJR
Semi-Major Radius A if ISPCOD =

1
O N O O O N O O O O O O O
O N O
SEMIMINR
Semi-Minor Radius B if ISPCOD =

1
O N O O O N O O O O O O O
O N O
AZIMUTH
Azimuth of center line at skew origin
N N N N N N N N N N Y N N
N N N
ORGNSCLE
Scale factor at origin
N N N N N N N N N N Y N N
N N N
RADTYPE
Radius Calculation Method
N N N N N N N N N N N N N
N N Y
Key:
Y = parameter required
N = parameter not required
O = parameter optional; if not specified, default value is used
Hemisphere defines false northing for UTM
One or the other is required
* UNITCODE = USER SUPPLIED
SPHEROID = USER-DEFINED
R2003.12.0
Also serves as a single standard parallel
Polyconic projection also has a central meridian with associated scale

tor
Process
155
Landmark
Projection End
Name
PROJECTION END
Alternate Name E PRJ
R2003.12.0
Function
This process signals the end of a particular projection. After finding a

PROJECTION END in the ZCL command stream, further pictures
assume no projection is active unless another PROJECTION command
is found.
Parameters
No Parameters
Process
156
Landmark
Quality Assure
Name
QUALITY ASSURE
Alternate Name CP GRID QA

Function
This process back interpolates a set of control points to a given surface.

It then calculates the difference (residual) between the interpolated z
value and the z value of the control point, and produces a statistical
analysis of residuals in the form of a histogram and printed statistical
data.
You can use Quality Assurance to:
evaluate the quality of a dataset
evaluate how well a grid represents the original data
plot selected residuals to use as a guide in interactive grid editing
Parameters
Parameter
Name
GRIDIN
MFDGRID
I
C*24
MFDIN

05
FAULTS
C*24
I

Default Value = 0
05
C*24
MFDOUT
MFDFAULT
C*24
DATAIN
DATAOUT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type

file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output control point file.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output control point

file.
Default Value = 1
05

Default Value = 0
Process
157
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ERRANTRS
C*16

Method used to produce residuals, and type produced.
Default Value = THRESHOLDS
Options:
OMIT
= Do not produce residuals
EITHER
= Residual is selected if it qualifies by either the

thresholds or the contour crossing criteria
BOTH
= Residual is selected only if it qualifies by both

the thresholds and contour crossing criteria
THRESHOLDS
= Residual is selected if value is

outside the range of threshold
values
CONTOUR CROSSING = Residual is selected if it

elevation interpolated from
grid surface and elevation
from control point file are on
opposite sides of the plane
defined by a contour level
SELECT
R2003.12.0
C*4
Which residuals are written to the output file. Used if

DATAOUT is specified.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL
= All residuals are output
ONLY
= Only selected errant residuals are output
MAXRESID
Maximum residual for histogram.

Default Value = Based on input control data
THRESUPP
Upper threshold value. Used if ERRANTRS =

THRESHOLDS, EITHER, or BOTH.
THRESLOW
Lower threshold value. Used if ERRANTRS =

THRESHOLDS, EITHER, or BOTH.
CONINT
Contour interval. Used if ERRANTRS = CONTOUR

CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
Process
158
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CONMIN
Minimum contour level. Used if ERRANTRS =

CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
TOLERANC
Equality tolerance. If an elevation is equal to a contour

level in this tolerance, it is not considered to be across that
contour level from any elevation. Required if
ERRANTRS = CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or
BOTH.
Field number of the x field in the control point file.
XFLD
INFLD
Field number of the desired field in the control point file.

FLTXFLD
Field number of the x field in the input fault file.

FLTYFLD
Field number of the y field in the input fault file.

FLTIDFLD
Field number of the Segment ID field in the input fault

file.
Process
159
Landmark
Quick Volumetrics
Name
QUICK VOLUMETRICS
Alternate Name QUICK VOL

Function
This process provides a quick estimate of the volume between the

surface represented by the input grid and the flat surface with the
constant z value specified by the baseplane parameter (BASEPLAN),
bounded by a region specified by a polygon or polygons on an input
file specified by VERTICES. To calculate volume, this process
multiplies the area of the polygon by the numeric average of the grid
nodes in the polygon.
This process trades off accuracy for speed. Better accuracy can be
obtained by making the grid increment smaller.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
VERTICES
C*24
MFDVERT

Name of the polygon vertex file. If not specified, the
region of integration is the entire grid AOI.
05

Default Value = 0
GRIDIN
C*24
MFDIN
AREASCAL
Area scale factor.

Default Value = 1.0
VOLMSCAL
Volume scale factor.

Default Value = 1.0
BASEPLAN
Baseplane z value.
Default Value = 0.0
05

Default Value = 0
Process
160
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SELECT
C*8

Which polygons in the vertex file to use in the integration
task.
Note: The maximum number of polygons that can be
integrated at one time is 500.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL
= All polygons on the vertex file are used.
ONLY
= Up to 40 polygon IDs specified with

POLYIDS are used.
EXCEPT
= Up to 40 polygon IDs specified with

POLYIDS are ignored.
POLYIDS
Array of up to 40 Segment IDs for polygons in input

vertices file over which volumes are calculated. Required
if SELECT = ONLY or EXCEPT.
DBIDS
Use number of the output DATA BLOCK for the polygon

Segment IDs that indicate which polygons were
integrated.
Default Value = 0
DBAREA
Use number of the output DATA BLOCK for the

computed areas.
If DATASIZE = 1 for the referenced DATA BLOCK,
then single precision values are stored. If DATASIZE = 2,
then double precision values are stored.
Default Value = 0
DBVOLM
Use number of the output DATA BLOCK for the

computed volumes.
If DATASIZE = 1 for the referenced DATA BLOCK,
then single precision values are stored. If DATASIZE = 2,
then double precision values are stored.
Default Value = 0
Process
161
Landmark
Random Grid
Name
RANDOMGRID
Alternate Name GRIDRAND

Function
This process generates a grid using a pseudo-random number

generator. The user selects the type of distribution, and specifies the
distributions parameters as constants or as grids to vary the parameters
across the AOI.
This process has been used to generate test data, and may be useful for
statistical simulations.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
PRM1GRD
C*24
PRM1MFD
PRM2GRD
C*24
PRM2MFD
FILOUT
MFDOUT
R2003.12.0
Range
Name of optional input PARAM1 grid file. If this file is

input, output grid parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN,
YMAX, GXINC, GYINC) will come from it. For main
use of PARAM1 and PARAM2, see parameter
METHOD. If both PRM1GRD and PRM2GRD are
input, their grid parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN,
YMAX, GXINC, GYINC) must match.
05
Number of the MFD that contains optional input

PARAM1 grid file.
Name of optional input PARAM2 grid file. If file name
PRM1GRD is blank, and this file is input, output grid
parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX, GXINC,
GYINC) will come from it. For main use of PARAM1
and PARAM2, see parameter METHOD. If both
PRM1GRD and PRM2GRD are input, their grid
parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX, GXINC,
GYINC) must match.
05
C*24
I
Description and Default
Number of the MFD that contains optional input

PARAM2 grid file.
Name of the output GRID file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the output GRID file.
Process
162
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
METHOD
C*20
Gridding method.
Default Value = GAUSS SIGMA
Options:
EVEN RANGE = Evenly distributed in the range
from PARAM1 to PARAM2.
EVENDELTA=Evenlydistributedintherangefrom
(PARAM1-PARAM2) to
(PARAM1+PARAM2).
GAUSS SIGMA RANGE = Gaussian distributed with
mean = (PARAM1+PARAM2)/2
and standard deviation =
ABS((PARAM2-PARAM1)/2)
GAUSS SIGMA = Gaussian distributed with mean =
PARAM1 and standard deviation
= PARAM2.
EVEN SIGMA RANGE = Evenly distributed on a
range such that mean is (PARAM2
+ PARAM1)/2 and standard
deviation is (PARAM2 PARAM1)/2.
EVEN SIGMA = Evenly distributed on a range such
that mean is PARAM1 and
standard deviation is PARAM2.
REPORT
C*8

Options:
FULL
PARTIAL
NONE
RANDSEED
Default Value = Seed for Random Number Generation.

Options: Default Value = 0
Options:
= -1
Generates an arbitrary seed for a
non-reproducible sequence of
pseudo-random numbers.
<-1
Allows the system to choose the default
seed
>-1
Uses the input value as the seed
GRIDXMIN
Minimum X-coordinate of the gridding area. Default is

0.0.
Process
163
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
GRIDXMAX
Default Value = Maximum X-coordinate of the gridding

area. No default.
GRIDXINC
Gridding interval in the X-direction. Default is 1.0.
GRIDYMIN
Minimum Y-coordinate of the gridding area. Default is

0.0.
GRIDYMAX
Maximum Y-coordinate of the gridding area. No default.
GRIDYINC
Gridding interval in the Y-direction. Default is 1.0.
PARAM1
First parameter for random distribution function. See

parameter METHOD. If grid file PRM1GRD is
supplied, its Z-values will be substituted for this
parameter. Default is 0.0.
PARAM2
First parameter for random distribution function. See

parameter METHOD. If grid file PRM2GRD is
supplied, its Z-values will be substituted for this
parameter. Default is 1.0.
GRIDZMIN
Minimum allowed grid Z-value. If random value

generated is less than GRZMIN, it will be set to
GRZMIN. Default is -0.999E+30.
GRIDZMAX
Maximum allowed grid Z-value. If random value

generated is greater than GRZMAX, it will be set to
GRZMAX. Default is +0.999E+30.
Process
164
Landmark
Range Edit
Name
RANGE EDIT
Alternate Name
Function
This process sifts out unwanted data points from an entire dataset, a
particular seismic or cross-section line (a line name field must be
present), an area (an area name field must be present) or any character
field specified.
Using the SELECT parameter, the user can control whether to keep
data points whose numeric field value is inside or outside of the
specified range. Unless performed over the entire dataset, RANGE
EDIT only discards those points that have matching line/name/
character fields, and that do not satisfy the range criteria. All other data
points pass through to the new file.
In all instances, you must select the field to range edit, and decide upon
the upper and lower range values for that field. The default is the upper
and lower range of the selected data field.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
DATAOUT
MFDOUT
SELECT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type

Name of the input data file.
05
C*24
I
C*8

Default Value = 0
Name of the output data file.
05

Default Value = 1
Which points to output.
Default Value = INSIDE
Options:
INSIDE
= Output values inside range
OUTSIDE
= Output values outside range
Process
165
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
EDITTYPE
C*16
STRING
R2003.12.0

Scope of Range Editing.
Default Value = ENTIRE DATASET
Options:
ENTIRE
DATASET
= Edit based on the entire dataset
LINE MATCH
= Edit based on a seismic or

cross-section line
AREA MATCH
= Edit based on an area name
TEXT MATCH
= Edit based on a text field match
C*80
String to match against a line name field or an area name

field or against some character field. Used if EDITTYPE
= LINE MATCH, AREA MATCH, or TEXT MATCH.
TEXTFLD
Field number of the Character field to match. Used if

EDITTYPE = TEXT MATCH.
If EDITTYPE = AREA MATCH or LINE MATCH the
first field of type Area Name or Line Name is used.
INFLDS
Array of up to 12 field numbers for the fields to edit.

FLDMINS
Array of up to 12 values for the lower ranges of the

selected fields, in the same position as the corresponding
INFLDS field.
Default Value = Actual field minimum
FLDMAXS
Array of up to 12 values for the upper ranges of the

selected fields, in the same position as the corresponding
INFLDS field.
Default Value = Actual field maximum
Process
166
Landmark
Rasterize Faults
Name
RASTERIZE FAULTS
Alternate Name FLT RASTER

Function
This process converts a regular fault file into a rasterized fault file in
which the fault segments are parallel to the lattice rows and columns,
for use with reservoir simulators.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LATTICE
C*24
MFDIN
FAULTS
C*24
MFDFAULT

Name of the input lattice file.
05

05
FAULTOUT C*24
MFDOUT
R2003.12.0
Number of the MFD that contains the input lattice file.

Default Value = 0

Default Value = 0
Name of output rasterized fault file.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output rasterized fault

file.
Default Value = 1
Process
167
Landmark
Reinitialize
Name
REINITIALIZE
Alternate Name INIT

Function
This process allows you to reset both the Use Number and the Back
Reference Number back to 000. This is useful on very long ZCL runs
where you have stepped your Use Numbers by 10s or 100s and have
reached 499. By inserting a REINITIALIZE process statement, you
can start your numbering system over again.
The affect of inserting a REINITIALIZE Process statement is to cause
all ZCL processes before the statement to be executed. It also means
that you can no longer reference back to ZCL processes before the
REINITIALIZE command.
R2003.12.0
Notes
Use Number and Back Reference Number are not used by this process;
if they are included, they are ignored.
Example
REINITIALIZE:
Parameters
No Parameters
Process
168
Landmark
Rename MFD
Name
RENAME MFD
Alternate Name CHANGE MFD NAME

Function
This process changes the internally stored MFD name associated with
an MFD.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MFDNAME
C*80
Disk file name of the MFD.
HEADER
C*24
New internal name for MFD.
Process
169
Landmark
Rename Pict
Name
RENAME PICT
Alternate Name REN PIC

Function
This process renames a picture on a graphics file.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZGFNAME
C*80
Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to

rename.
Default Value = Graphics file that is currently open
FROMPICT
C*80
Name of the picture to renamed.

Default Value = Picture that is currently open
C*80
Name for the new (renamed) picture.
TOPICT
R2003.12.0
Process
170
Landmark
Reset Cell To Well

Name
RESET CELL TO WELL
Alternate Name CELL VAL = WELL VAL

Function
This process modifies a RESIN cell table by overriding cell values by

the value of the well falling in that same cell (if any).
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CELLFILE
C*24
MFDCELL
WELLFILE
C*24
MFDWELL
R2003.12.0

Name of the input RESIN cell table.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input RESIN cell

table.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input well data.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input well data.

Default Value = 0
CELLFLD
Field number in the cell file whose value can be

overridden by well data positioned in the cell.
Note: Fields 15 in a cell table file are reserved for fields
X, Y, XC, YC, and AREA.
WELLFLD
Field number in the well file whose value can potentially

override the cell table file field information.
Process
171
Landmark
Rotate Data
Name
ROTATE DATA
Alternate Name ROTA

Function
This process transforms a dataset in x and y coordinates by rotating it

around a point.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
DATAOUT

05
C*24
MFDOUT
05

Default Value = 1
ANGLE
0.0
360.0
Clockwise angle for rotating data, in degrees.

degrees
R2003.12.0

Default Value = 0
XZERO
The x coordinate in the input file about which data is

rotated.
Default Value = 0.0
YZERO
The y coordinate in the input file about which data is

rotated.
Default Value = 0.0
XROTATED
The x coordinate of the rotated point in the output

coordinate system.
Default Value = 0.0
YROTATED
The y coordinate of the rotated point in the output

coordinate system.
Default Value = 0.0
SCALE
Scale factor applied to the rotated x and y coordinates and

the gradients if applicable.
Default Value = 1.0
XFLD

Process
172
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
YFLD

DXFLD

Default Value = First DZ/DX field
DYFLD

Default Value = First DZ/DY field
Process
173
Landmark
Scale Bar
Name
SCALE BAR
Alternate Name SCAL

Function
This process draws a scale bar on a picture.
Notes

Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SCTYPES
C*16

Array of up to 7 options indicating the type(s) of scales to
draw.
Default Value = KILOMETERS and STATUTE MILES
Options:
METERS
FEET
YARDS
INCHES
KILOMETERS
NAUTICAL MILES
STATUTE MILES
US SURVEY FEET
R2003.12.0
XLOWLEFT
The x position of the lower left corner of the bottom scale,

in plotter units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION =
ARBITRARY.
YLOWLEFT
The y position of the lower left corner of the bottom scale,

in plotter units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION =
ARBITRARY.
HEIGHT
Height of each scale bar excluding annotation, in plotter

units (in or cm). The height of text annotating bars is
computed as a fraction of this value.
WIDTH
Maximum width of scale bar excluding annotation, in

Process
173
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
UNITCODE
C*16
Units of measurement used by the picture. Used if the

map is not projected.
Default Value = FEET
Options:
METERS
FEET
YARDS
INCHES
KILOMETERS
NAUTICAL MILES
STATUTE MILES
US SURVEY FEET
UNITFACT
Projected coordinates units factor, in units per meter.

Used depending on type of projection selected.
1.0
LOCATION
C*12
Position of scale bar.

Default Value = LOWER LEFT
Options:
LOWER LEFT
LOWER RIGHT
LOWER CENTER
ARBITRARY
R2003.12.0
=
=
=
=
Lower left of picture

Lower right of picture
Lower center of picture
Arbitrary location specified by
XLOWLEFT and YLOWLEFT
Process
174
Landmark
Scale Bias LNAR

Name
SCALE BIAS LNAR
Alternate Name S B LNAR

Function
This process scales or biases values for a specific line or area.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
MFDIN
Data
Type
C*24
FILEOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
OPNAME
C*12
Name of input file.

Range Options:
Data, contour, fault, vertex, text, cross-section,
seismic-section
05

Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.
05

Default Value = 1
Operation to perform.
Default Value = SCALE LINE
Options:
SCALE
LINE
SCALE
AREA
BIAS
LINE
BIAS
AREA
LINNMFLD
R2003.12.0
= Multiply the values in records that match

the specified line name by PARAM value
= Multiply the values in records that match
the specified area name by PARAM value
= Add PARAM value to the values in records
that match the specified line name
= Add PARAM value to the values in records
that match the specified area name
Field number of the Line Name field. Used if OPNAME =

SCALE LINE or BIAS LINE.
Default Value = First Line Name field
Process
175
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
ARENMFLD
LINEAREA
C*80

Field number of the Area Name field. Used if OPNAME
= SCALE AREA or BIAS AREA.
Default Value = First Area Name field
Line or area name.
INFLD
Field number of the field to scale or bias.

PARAM
Scale or bias value for the line or area.

Default Value = 1
Process
176
Landmark
Seis Append XY
Name
SEIS APPEND XY
Alternate Name APPEND XY

Function
This process calculates x and y coordinates for seismic shotpoints using

a coordinate reference file.
The input file has its information relative to seismic shotpoint
numbers. The coordinate reference file relates seismic shotpoint
numbers for a particular line name to x and y coordinates. The output
file has x and y coordinate fields appended to the other fields of the
input file.
The input file must contain line names and shotpoint numbers. It must
be sorted by the ZCL SORT Process by Line Name and then Shotpoint
Number. This file must be of type DATA.
The coordinate reference file must contain Line Name, Shotpoint
Number, X- and Y fields. This file must also be sorted by the ZCL
SORT Process by Line Name and then Shotpoint Number.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
COORDIN
C*24
MFDCOORD
DATAOUT
MFDOUT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type

05
Name of the input coordinate reference file.

05
C*24
I

Default Value = 0
Number of the MFD that contains the input reference

coordinate file.
Default Value = 0
Default Value = Based on the input data file name
05

Default Value = 1
Process
177
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
BRKTOLR
Numbering interval break tolerance. This is the difference

between the shotpoint numbers of successive points on
the coordinate reference file.
This tolerance is used to initially determine if successive
points on the coordinate reference file are close enough to
use for interpolation or extrapolation. If the value of
BRKTOLR is smaller than INTTOLR or EXTTOLR,
then those parameters have no effect. Usually either
BRKTOLR is larger than the values for INTTOLR or
EXTTOLR, or BRKTOLR is equal to the value of
INTTOLR.
Default Value = 100,000,000.0
DISTOLR
Distance break tolerance.

This distance is used after BRKTOLR to determine if two
successive points on the coordinate reference file are
close enough to use for interpolation or extrapolation.
INTTOLR
Interpolation numbering interval tolerance.

After two points on the coordinate reference file have
been selected to use for interpolation, and have satisfied
the limits imposed by parameters BRKTOLR and
DISTOLR, then this parameter comes into play. If the
shotpoint number interval between those points exceeds
INTTOLR, then the possibility of performing
interpolation is ruled out, and the possibility of
extrapolation is considered.
EXTTOLR
Extrapolation numbering interval tolerance.

The interval between the shotpoint number of the input
point and the shotpoint number of the closest coordinate
reference input point is compared to this extrapolation
interval tolerance parameter. If that interval exceeds
EXTTOLR, then extrapolation is not performed for that
point.
C*80
Name of output exception report disk file.

This file reports any input point for which an X,Y value
could not be determined because of one of the tests
associated with the above parameters. It reports any break
situation detected near an input record. Breaks that are not
near an input record are not reported.
REPORT
R2003.12.0
Process
178
Landmark
Seis Interp Thin

Name
SEIS INTERP THIN
Alternate Name SEIS THIN

Function
This process performs seismic interpolation data thinning for a

specified shotpoint increment.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
DATAOUT
MFDOUT
SHPTINC
R2003.12.0
Data
Type

05
C*24
I

Default Value = 0
05

Default Value = 1
Shotpoint increment.
XFLD
Field number of X field in the input file.

YFLD
Field number of Y field in the input file.

SHTPTFLD
Field number of the Shotpoint Number field.

Default Value = First Shotpoint Number field
LINNMFLD
Field number of the Line Name field.

LINUMFLD
Field number of the Line Number field in the input data

file.
Default Value = First Line Number field
Process
179
Landmark
Select Posting Parameters

Modulation-Range
Set the current posting parameters based on the index of the
matching selection criteria (see Select Seismic Data To Post on
page 209). The Modulation-Range is set up if any posted items
rely on the Modulation-field. The user can specify one of the
options shown for ZRNGMODE (as described in the Post
Seismic New topic) to create the Modulation-Range.
If the user specifies TYPE IN, the user creates the
Modulation-Range table manually by entering up to 50 values.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the user specifies the number of
levels to use for dividing the maximum/minimum modulation
range (from the parameter header record).
If the user specifies INC, the user specifies an increment to use
for increasing each level of the Modulation-Range table, starting
with the data fields minimum value.
If the user specifies INC+START, the user specifies a start value
and an increment to use for increasing each level of the
Modulation-Range table.
Size Table
The Size table is set up if any posted items rely on a modulated
size. The user can specify one of the options shown for
SIZETMOD (as described in the Post Seismic New topic) to
create the Size table.
If the user specifies TYPE IN, the user creates the Size table
manually by entering up to 50 values.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the user specifies the number of
levels to use for dividing the size value range.
If the user specifies INC, the user specifies an increment to use
for increasing each level of the Size table, starting with a
minimum size value.
If the user specifies INC+START, the user specifies a start value
and an increment to use for increasing each level of the Size
table.
R2003.12.0
Process
180
Landmark
Apply Posting Parameters

Extract 3D Elements To Post
Select 3D Track Lines To Post
The user specifies which track lines in the 3D Seismic Survey to
post. The supported options are shown for 3DTKMODE (as
described in the Post Seismic New topic).
If the user specifies ALL, all track lines in the 3D Seismic survey
are posted.
If the user specifies RATE, the first, last, and each 3DTKRATEth
track line starting with 3DTKSTRT track number is posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the first, last, and each track
number plus a bias evenly divisible by a user-specified value are
posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no 3D track lines are posted.
Convert 3D Track Line to 2D Track Line
So that the down-stream processes can treat track line data from
3D surveys the same as data from 2D Seismic surveys, this
process converts 3D track line data to 2D track line data.
The sort key information is read to determine how to treat the 3D
track line. If the data is sorted 3D Survey Name, 3D Line
Number, 3D Shotpoint Number, then the line name is assigned to
the 3D Line Number, and the shotpoint numbers are equated with
the 3D Shotpoint Number. If, however, the data is sorted 3D
Survey Name, 3D Shotpoint Number, 3D Line Number, then the
line name is assigned to the 3D Shotpoint Number and the
shotpoint number is assigned to the 3D Line Number.
Apply Shotpoint Symbol Parameters
Select Shotpoints To Post
The user specifies which shotpoints to post. The supported
options are shown for SYMPSTMD (as described in the Post
Seismic New topic).
If the user specifies ALL, all shotpoints are posted.
R2003.12.0
Process
181
Landmark
If the user specifies RATE, the shotpoints at the endpoints of the

seismic line, and each POSTRATEth shotpoint starting with the
POSTADDth shotpoint are posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, these shotpoints are posted: The
shotpoints at the endpoints of the seismic line and each shotpoint
number plus POSTADD that is evenly divisible by POSTRATE.
If the user specifies INTERVAL, each shotpoint that is at least
POSTRATE distance from the previous shotpoint is posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no shotpoints on the matched track
line are posted.
If Discontinuity Usage is enabled, each shotpoint at a
discontinuity is also posted if SYMPSTMD = RATE, DIVIDE,
or INTERVAL.
After selecting the shotpoints, this process verifies that two
consecutive shotpoints are not within a user-specified distance
from each other.
Determine Shotpoint Symbol Size
The user has several options for controlling the size of the posted
shotpoint symbol; a field in the data can be specified as having
the symbol size as data, a field in the data can be specified whose
data is used to look up the size of the symbol in a table, or a size
value specific to the matched selection criteria can be entered.
If the user has specified that discontinuities should be used, and
the current shotpoint falls at a discontinuity point, the size of the
symbol is scaled by a user-supplied discontinuity Symbol Size
Ratio.
Determine Shotpoint Symbol Code
The user has two options for controlling the symbol used for the
shotpoint; a field in the data can be specified as having the
symbol code as data or a symbol code specific to the matched
selection criteria can be entered.
R2003.12.0
Process
182
Landmark
If the user has specified that discontinuities should be used, and

the current shotpoint falls at a discontinuity point or in a
discontinuity, the data in the discontinuity field is used to look up
the symbol in a user-configured Symbol table. If the data in the
discontinuity field is not a valid index in the Symbol table, the
normal symbol for the line is used and a diagnostic message is
generated.
The Symbol table is a flat file that the user can configure as
desired. The file consists of two columns: discontinuity code and
symbol code.
The file is self-documented with more specifics about its format.
Seismic posting first looks in the users home directory for the
symbol code file $HOME/.zplus_disconts_codes
If this file is not found, seismic posting looks in the standard files
directory $DISCONT/files/Discont_codes
If not found there, no discontinuity symbol code field is used.
Example .Zplus_disconts_codes File
# .Zplus_disconts_codes is used by the POSTSEISMICNEW algorithm.
# It maps discontinuity values into symbol codes.
# Rules: Columns 1-10 are discontinuity values
# Columns 11-20 are the mapped symbol codes
# # in column 1 begins a comment
# Line width limited to 80 characters
#
# 1 2
# line below calibrates column positions 1-25
#234567890123456789012345
3.0
4.0
1.0
2.0
19
10
3
14
The values on the left are discontinuity codes. The values opposite them on the right
are the symbol code associated with each discontinuity code.
Determine Shotpoint Symbol Color

The user has several options for controlling the color of the
posted shotpoint symbol; a field in the data can be specified as
having the symbol color as data; a field in the data can be
specified whose data is used to look up the color of the symbol in
a table; or a color value specific to the matched selection criteria
can be entered.
R2003.12.0
Process
183
Landmark
Apply 3D Survey Name Parameters

The font of the 3D survey name label can be specified as a field
in the data, or as a font value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
The size of the 3D survey name label can be specified as a field
in the data, or as a size value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
The color for the 3D survey name label can be specified as a field
in the data, or as a color value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
The options for specifying the location of the 3D survey name
are specified in the he 3D Survey Name Locations table. These
options are illustrated below:
BOTH+LINE or
START+LINE
BOTH+LINE or
END+LINE
BOTH+SHOT or
START+SHOT
BOTH+SHOT or
END+SHOT
CENTER
For each selection criteria, the user can specify an angle that
incrementally changes the orientation of the label. The
incremental angle specifies the additional counterclockwise
angle applied to the default orientation for the survey name using
the center of the label as the rotation point.
R2003.12.0
Process
184
Landmark
Verify Label Visibility

By default, 2D/3D line names and 3D survey names are not
posted if they fall partially or totally outside the border AOI
region. However, the user optionally can tell seismic posting to
attempt to reposition these labels according to these criteria:
2D/3D Line Names. Place the label immediately outside the
border AOI.
3D Survey Names. First any add-on label angle is removed;
if the label is still obscured, an attempt is made to slide the
label back inside the border AOI; if this fails, a diagnostic
message is issued.
Apply Track Line Posting Parameters
Select Track Line Points
The user can specify that track lines be drawn with only the
points posed with shotpoints, or all points in the data set for that
seismic line.
Determine Track Line Weight
The line weight of a track line can be specified as a field in the
data, or as a weight value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
Determine Track Line Pattern
The line pattern of a track line can be specified as a field in the
data, or, as a line pattern value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
If the user has specified that discontinuities are acknowledged,
and the line is in a discontinuity, the line pattern can be set from a
user-specified discontinuity line pattern specific to the matched
selection criteria.
R2003.12.0
Process
185
Landmark
Determine Track Line Color

The user has several options for controlling the color of the
posted track line; a field in the data can be specified as having the
track line color as data; a field in the data can be specified whose
data is used to look up the color of the track line in a table; or a
color value specific to the matched selection criteria can be
entered.
Apply Shotpoint Label Parameters
Select Shotpoint Numbers To Post
The user specifies which shotpoint numbers to post. The
supported options are shown for SYMLABMD (as described in
the Post Seismic New topic).
If the user specifies ALL, a shotpoint number is posted at each
posted shotpoint symbol.
If the user specifies RATE, the shotpoint numbers at the
endpoints of the seismic line, and each LABLRATEth shotpoint
number starting with the LABLADDth shotpoint number is
posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the shotpoint number at the
endpoints of the seismic line, and each shotpoint number where
shotpoint number plus LABLADD is evenly divisible by
LABLRATE is posted.
If the user specifies INTERVAL, each shotpoint number that is at
least LABLRATE distance from the previous shotpoint is posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no shotpoint numbers are posted.
discontinuity are also posted if SYMLABMD = RATE, DIVIDE,
or INTERVAL.
After the user selects the shotpoint numbers, this process verifies
that two consecutive shotpoint numbers are not within a
user-specified distance from each other.
R2003.12.0
Process
186
Landmark
Determine Shotpoint Label Color

The user has two options for controlling the color of the posted
shotpoint number; a field in the data can be specified as having
the label color as data, or a color value specific to the matched
Set Shotpoint Number Parameters
The location of the shotpoint number is specific to the matched
selection criteria. The supported options are shown for SYMLABMD
(as described in the Post Seismic New topic). If the seismic line
contains only a single point, the orientation of the label is 0 degrees
with respect to the x axis; otherwise the default orientation of the label
is perpendicular to the line.
The user can specify a selection specific label size for the shotpoint
number.
The user can specify an angle that incrementally changes the
orientation of the label. The incremental angle is specified as the
number of the counterclockwise degrees to add to the default
orientation of the label as rotated around the shotpoint.
If a Reshot Character field is available in the data file, the
character contained in the field is appended to the shotpoint label.
R2003.12.0
Process
187
Landmark
Apply Attribute Label Parameters

Select Attribute Labels To Post
The user specifies which attribute labels to post. The supported
options are shown for ATTBMODE (as described in the Post
Seismic New topic).
If the user specifies ALL, an attribute label is posted at each
posted shotpoint symbol.
If the user specifies RATE, the attribute labels at the endpoints of
the seismic line, and each ATTBRATEth attribute label starting
with the ATTBADDth attribute label is posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the attribute labels at the endpoints
of the seismic line, and each attribute label where shotpoint
number plus ATTBADD is evenly divisible by ATTBRATE is
posted.
If the user specifies INTERVAL, each attribute label that is at
least ATTBRATE distance from the previous attribute label is
posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no attribute labels are posted.
discontinuity is also labeled if ATTBMODE = RATE, DIVIDE,
or INTERVAL.
Determine Attribute Color
The user has two options for controlling the color of the posted
attribute label; a field in the data can be specified as having the
label color as data; or, a color value specific to the matched
R2003.12.0
Process
188
Landmark
Set Attribute Label Parameters

The location of the attribute label is specific to the matched
selection criteria. The supported options are shown for
ATTBMODE (as described in the Post Seismic New topic). If
the seismic line contains only a single point, the orientation of
the label is 0 degrees with respect to the x axis; otherwise, the
default orientation of the label is perpendicular to the line.
The user can specify a selection specific label size for the
attribute label.
orientation of the label. The incremental angle is specified as the
number of counter-clockwise degrees to add to the default
orientation of the label as rotated around the shotpoint.
Adjust Symbol Angle
The orientation of each shotpoint symbol to post is adjusted
based on the angle of the track line to which it is attached. If the
seismic line contains only a single point, the symbol is posted as
if the line were parallel to the x axis.
Partition Track Line Using Shotpoint Breaks
A track line can be broken up into several segments by applying
tests to consecutive shotpoints.
If the difference between two consecutive shotpoint numbers
is greater than a user-specified value, the track line is broken.
If the distance between two consecutive shotpoints is greater
than a user-specified value, the track line is broken.
R2003.12.0
Process
189
Landmark
Apply Line Name Posting Parameters

Select Line Names To Post
The user specifies which track lines are posted with line names.
The supported options are shown for 3DLNMODE (as described
in the Post Seismic New topic).
If the user specifies ALL, all track lines are posted with a line
name.
If the user specifies RATE, the first, last, and each 3DLNRATEth
line name starting with 3DLNSTRT line number are posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, a line name for the first, last, and
each 3D line number evenly divisible by a user-specified value
are posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no line names are posted.
Set Line Name Posting Parameters
If the line name is being posted from a Line Name field (2D
seismic data), the font of the label can be specified as a field in
the data, or as a font value specific to the matched selection
criteria. If the line name is being posted from a Seismic Line
Number or 3D Line Number field, the font defaults to PLAIN.
The size of the line name label can be specified as a field in the
data, or as a size value specific to the matched selection criteria.
The color of the line name label can be specified as a field in the
data, or as a color value specific to the matched selection criteria.
The supported options for the location of the line name are
shown for LNLOCATE (as described in the Post Seismic New
topic). If LNORIENT = LINE, the label is oriented parallel to the
track line; if LNORIENT = X-AXIS, the label is oriented parallel
to the x axis. If the seismic line contains only a single point, the
orientation of the line name is set as if the line were parallel to
the x axis. If you specify LINE, the angle of the line is calculated
by using the endpoint and the next nearest point.
orientation of the label. The incremental angle is the number of
counter-clockwise degrees to add to the default orientation of the
label using a center of rotation around the nearest shotpoint.
R2003.12.0
Process
190
Landmark
Select
Name
SELECT
Alternate Name DATA SUBSETTING

Function
This process extracts a subset of data from a data file according to

criteria tailored to meet the needs of the cartographic community:
the value of a field lies in a range of values (a range edit)

a record satisfies a thinning criterion (a thinning edit)
a point is located inside or outside a polygon (a location edit)
This process copies records that meet the specified criteria to the
output dataset without modifying them. The order of the selected
points in the output dataset is preserved from the input dataset. Since
the order of the points is preserved in the output dataset, sort flags
attached to the input dataset are preserved in the output dataset also.
Valid Combinations for parameter FILEIN
This chart depicts which edit options can be used on different file
types. It also depicts the criteria for sorting the input file (FILEIN).
File Type
Location
Thinning
Range
DATA (random)
OK
OK
OK
DATA (seismic)
OK
CNTR
FALT
VERT
TEXT
OK
OK
OK
SSEC
N/A
XSEC
N/A
DWEL
OK
OK = The success of the operation does not depend on the order of the
points in the file.
N/A = The operation is not performed by SELECT.
1 = If the extra points outside the select area are retained, the file
must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
2 = The file must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
3 = The order of the points in the file should be as they were loaded or
generated.
R2003.12.0
Process
191
Landmark
Valid Combinations for parameters XFLD and YFLD

This table depicts which fields from the input file (FILEIN) are needed
and/or used in a location edit.
Type of Coordinates in the File
SLCTSRCE
XY
LL
XY&LL
XY
N/A
ROTATEDXY
N/A
LL
ROTATEDLL
N/A
GRID
N/A
DATA XY only
N/A
DATA LL only
10
11
DATA XY & LL
12
11
11
PICTURE not projected
N/A
PICTURE projected
POLYGON
N/A
Key:
N/A
= SELECT does not process this case.
= Coordinates are of the same type. SELECT performs a simple point-in-polygon check.
= The latitude/longitude fields are ignored. SELECT performs a simple point-in-polygon check with the
XY fields.
= If the file contains projection parameters, they are used to transform the LL coordinates of the corner
points of a selected area rectangle to XY coordinates. SELECT then expands this rectangle by 10%
along each side of each rectangle. Processing is performed as in case 1 above.
= The XY coordinates on the file are ignored. Processing is performed as in case 1 above.
= If the file contains projection parameters, they are used to transform the LL coordinates of the origin of a
selected rectangle to XY coordinates. Processing is performed as in case 1 above.
If the file does not contain projection parameters, SELECT detects an error condition and returns control
to the calling module without performing any processing.
= The LL coordinates are ignored. Processing is performed as in case 5 above.
= The data file must contain XY coordinates. SELECT sets the selected area to the smallest
circumscribing rectangle for the data expanded by 1% on all sides.
= The LL coordinates in the file are ignored and processing is performed as in case 7 above.
= The SELECT file must contain projection information. The selected area is determined in LL as in case
7 above, it is transformed to XY coordinates using the projection parameters, and then expanded by 10%
on all four sides.
10
= The selected area is calculated in LL as in case 7 above, it is expanded by 1% on all four sides, and it is
then applied to the LL fields in the selected file.
11
= The XY coordinates are ignored. The selected file is processed as in case 10 above.
12
= The LL coordinates are ignored. The selected file is processed as in case 7 above.
R2003.12.0
Process
192
Landmark
Valid Combinations for parameter LINIDFLD

Field Type
File
Type
X
Field
Y
Field
Seg
ID
DATA
seismic
CNTR
Line
No.
Line
Nam
e
Horizo
n
Name
Req
VERT
Req
SSEC
XSEC
DWEL
*
Well
Nam
e
Req
FALT
Req
Well
Trac
k
= The input file is required to have this field.

= The input file is required to have one of these fields:
For SSEC or XSEC files, the preference is given to the horizon name field for
thinning purposes.
For DWEL file the preference is given to the well track field for thinning
purposes.
Valid Combinations for parameters WLDMULTI & WLDSINGL

You can specify masks for text fields using the wildcard characters
asterisk (*) and percent sign (%).
The SELECT function interprets the asterisk to match 0 or more
characters. For example, the mask LINE* matches any string that has
the first four characters LINE but does not match the string LINE.
The mask LINE*1 matches the following strings:
LINE 1
LINE1
LINE 01
LINE01
LINE 11
LINE#1
LINE 21
LINEXXX1
but does not match the string LINE 10.

The SELECT function interprets the percent sign to match exactly one
character. For example, the mask LINE% matches any string that
contains five characters with the first four being LINE but does not
match LINE. The mask LINE%1 matches the following strings:
LINE 1
LINE21
LINE31
LINE41
but does not match the strings LINE1 or LINE 1 (note that the
first character of this string is a blank).
A mask can contain more than one wildcard character. For example,
the mask %A* matches all strings that contains the letter A in the
second position.
R2003.12.0
Process
193
Landmark
You can redefine the wildcard characters by using the WLDMULTI

and WLDSINGL parameters. SELECT does not allow the multi-place
and single-place wildcard characters to be the same character.
Valid Combinations for parameters THINOPER & RNGOPERS for thinning edit
Comparison Operators
EQ
= equal to VALUE
NE
= not equal to VALUE
LT
= less than VALUE
LE
= less than or equal to VALUE
GT
= greater than VALUE
GE
= greater than or equal to VALUE
BETWEEN
= between two VALUEs; the values are included
OUTSIDE
= not in the interval bounded by two VALUEs (endpoints

not included)
NOTNULL
= not equal to the NULL VALUE for the field
NULL
= equal to the NULL VALUE for the field
VALUE represents a number or character string. The type of VALUE must

be the same type as that of the field under consideration.
The operators EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, and GE compare the value of a
field to a user-specified value. For a Thinning Edit, you must specify
THNTXTAS if the field is a text field or THNVALAS if the field is a
numeric field. For a Range Edit, you must specify RNGTXTAS if the
field is a text field or RNGVALAS if the field is a numeric field. The
parameters THNTXTBS, THNVALBS, RNGTXTBS, and
RNGVALBS are ignored for each of these operators.
You must specify both endpoints of the range for the BETWEEN and
OUTSIDE operators. For a Thinning Edit, the BETWEEN and
OUTSIDE operators are related to the limits parameters as follows:
BETWEEN: text field THNTXTAS and text field

THNTXTBS
OUTSIDE: numeric field <THNVALAS or numeric field
>THNVALBS
For a Range Edit, the BETWEEN and OUTSIDE operators are related
to the limits parameters as follows:
BETWEEN: text field RNGTXTAS and text field

RNGTXTBS
OUTSIDE: numeric field <RNGVALAS or numeric field
>RNGVALBS
R2003.12.0
Process
194
Landmark
SELECT requires that:
THNTXTAS < THNTXTBS

THNVALAS < THNVALBS
RNGTXTAS < RNGTXTBS
RNGVALAS < RNGVALBS
For character fields, the relationship of one string to another depends
on the native character collating sequence of the computer executing
the program.
Valid Combinations for parameter EXTRA for location edit
This is an illustration of EXTRA points. Filled points are retained;
open points are discarded; points marked X are retained if EXTRA =
YES.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
R2003.12.0
for input file

Data
Type
C*24
MFDIN
XFLD
Name of the input file. See Valid Combinations on

page 191 for further details.
Range Options:
Data, contour, fault, line data, text, seismic-section,
cross-section, and deviated well files
05

Default Value = 0
Field number of the x or Longitude coordinates in the
input file. An X field is required if THINMODE =
ENDPOINTS+DISTANCE. An X field or Longitude
field is required for a location edit. See Valid
Combinations on page 192 for further details.
Default Value = First field of the correct type to use
Process
195
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
YFLD
Field number of the y or Latitude coordinates in the input

file. A Y field is required if THINMODE =
ENDPOINTS+DISTANCE. A Y field or Latitude field is
required for a location edit. See Valid Combinations on
page 192 for further details.
Default Value = First field of the correct type to use
SHTPTFLD
Field number of the shotpoint values in the input file.

Used for thinning edit if THINMODE =
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE.
Default Value = First shotpoint field
LINIDFLD
Field number of the Line Name, Line Number, Horizon

Name, Segment ID, Well Tract, Well Platform, or X field
in input file. See Valid Combinations on page 193 for
further details.
This field is used as the control comparison field as
mentioned by THINOPER. For some file types, it is also
used to differentiate between line segments. It is used for
line data defined as seismic data, contour, fault, vertex,
seismic-section, cross-section, or deviated well file types.
FILEOUT
C*24
MFDOUT

05

Default Value = 1
WLDMULTI C*1
Wildcard character that matches zero or more characters.

Used to specify masks for text fields for thinning and
range editing. See Valid Combinations on page 193 for
further details.
Default Value = * (asterisk)
WLDSINGL
Wildcard character that matches exactly one character.

Used to specify masks for text fields for thinning and
range editing. See Valid Combinations on page 193 for
further details.
Default Value = % (percent)
C*1
Process
196
Landmark
Parameters
for Location Edit selecting data by polygons

You can select those records from a dataset that are located either
inside or outside a polygon, called the selected area. The selected area
can be specified by one of the following methods:
as the union of up to 10 rectangles that can be rotated relative

to a horizontal axis
as the union of polygons specified in a vertex file
as the area encompassed by a grid file
as the area encompassed by a picture residing in a graphics
file
as the area defined by data points in a data file
Points that lie on the boundary of a polygon are considered to be inside
the polygon.
For line-oriented data, you can instruct the SELECT process to retain
points on a line that are immediately across the boundary of the
polygon. For example, to retain only those points on a seismic line that
lie inside a polygon, instruct the SELECT process to also retain an
extra point immediately outside the polygon wherever the polygon cuts
the line. See Valid Combinations on page 195. This feature allows
the characteristics of the line to extend to the boundary of the polygon.
The SELECT function observes only one type of limit parameters
specified with the SLCTSRCE parameter. For example, if SLCTSRCE
= GRID, then other limit parameters such as XMIN, YMIN,
MNLATDEG are ignored.
R2003.12.0
Process
197
Landmark
If the selected area is specified in terms of multiple polygons, the

SELECT function considers the selected area to be the union of the
polygons. Therefore, if RETAIN = INSIDE, any point that resides
inside any of the polygons is retained in the output file.
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SLCTSRCE
C*12

Defines how the selected area limits are specified for
location edit.
Options:
NONE
XY
= Location edit is not desired

= Up to 10 area limits are defined by
Northing/Easting coordinates: XMINS,
XMAXS, YMINS, YMAXS
LL
Latitude/Longitude coordinates in degrees,
minutes, and seconds: MNLONDGS,
MNLONMNS, MNLONSCS,
MXLONDGS, MXLONMNS,
MXLONSCS, MNLATDGS,
MNLATMNS, MNLATSCS,
MXLATDGS, MXLATMNS,
MXLATSCS
GRID
= Area limits are defined by input grid file
GRIDNAME
DATA
= Area limits are defined by input data file
DATAIN
PICTURE
= Area limits are defined by input picture
PICTURE
POLYGON
= Up to 10 area limits can be defined by
POLYIDS and input vertex file
POLYGONS; all of the polygons are
used if POLYIDS is not specified
ROTATEDXY
Northing/Easting coordinates:
XORIGINS, YORIGINS,
ANGLES, SIDEAS, SIDEBS
ROTATEDLL
Latitude/Longitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes, seconds:
LONORDGS, LONORMNS,
LONORSCS LATORDGS
R2003.12.0
Process
198
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
RETAIN
C*8

Which points are retained. Important if user specifies a
location edit on line-oriented data, such as seismic data,
fault, vertex, contour, or deviated well files.
Default Value = INSIDE
Options:
b
INSIDE
OUTSIDE
EXTRA
C*4
= Retain the points inside the selected area

= Retain the points outside the selected
area
Inclusion of points on a line that lie immediately outside

the selected area. Valid for line data, i.e. seismic data,
fault, vertex, contour, or deviated well file type. See
Valid Combinations on page 195 for further details.
Default Value = NO
Options:
NO
YES
= Do not include the points

= Include the points
Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = XY

Values in the same position of the arrays in this group define the
corners of a polygon.
R2003.12.0
XMINS
Array of up to 10 x coordinate values defining the

minimum x coordinate of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = XY and XFLD is
X (EASTING) field type.
XMAXS
Array of up to 10 x coordinate values defining the

maximum x coordinate of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = XY and XFLD is
X (EASTING) field type.
YMINS
Array of up to 10 y coordinate values defining the

minimum y coordinate of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = XY and YFLD is
Y (NORTHING) field type.
YMAXS
Array of up to 10 y coordinate values defining the

maximum y coordinate of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = XY and YFLD is
Y (NORTHING) field type.
Process
199
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = LL

Values in the same position of the arrays in this group define the
corners of a polygon.
R2003.12.0
MNLONDGS
Array of up to 10 Longitude values defining the minimum

Longitude, degrees, of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = LL and XFLD is Longitude
field type.
Longitude, minutes, of the selected area rectangle.
field type.
MNLONMNS
MNLONSCS

Longitude, seconds, of the selected area rectangle.
field type.
MXLONDGS
Array of up to 10 Longitude values defining the

maximum Longitude, degrees, of the selected area
rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE = LL and XFLD is
Longitude field type.
MXLONMNS

maximum Longitude, minutes, of the selected area
MXLONSCS

maximum Longitude, seconds, of the selected area
MNLATDGS
Array of up to 10 Latitude values defining the minimum

Latitude, degrees, of the selected area rectangle. Required
if SLCTSRCE = LL and YFLD is Latitude field type.
MNLATMNS

Latitude, minutes, of the selected area rectangle. Required
MNLATSCS

Latitude, seconds, of the selected area rectangle. Required
MXLATDGS
Array of up to 10 Latitude values defining the maximum

Latitude, degrees, of the selected area rectangle. Required
Process
200
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MXLATMNS

Latitude, minutes, of the selected area rectangle. Required
MXLATSCS

Latitude seconds, of the selected area rectangle. Required
Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDXY

Values in the same position of the arrays in this group define a
polygon.
XORIGINS
Array of up to 10 x coordinate values defining the x

coordinate of the selected area rectangle, map units.
Required if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDXY and XFLD is X
(Easting) field type.
YORIGINS
Array of up to 10 y coordinate values defining the y

coordinate of the selected area rectangle, map units.
Required if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDXY and YFLD is Y
(Northing) field type.
ANGLES
Array of up to 10 angles of rotation, degrees, of the

selected area. Angle measured counterclockwise from an
unrotated x axis. Used if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDXY.
Default Value = 0.0
SIDEAS
Array of up to 10 x directions defining the extent of the

selected area, map units, before the ANGLE is applied to
the selected area. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDXY.
SIDEBS
Array of up to 10 y directions defining the extent of the

selected area, map units, before the ANGLE is applied to
the selected area. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDXY.
Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDLL

Values in the same position of the arrays in this group define a
polygon.
R2003.12.0
LONORDGS
Array of up to 10 values defining the Longitude, degrees,

of the selected area rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDLL and XFLD is Longitude field type.
LONORMNS
Array of up to 10 values defining the Longitude, minutes,

Process
201
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
LONORSCS
Array of up to 10 values defining the Longitude, seconds,

LATORDGS
Array of up to 10 values defining the Latitude, degrees, of

the selected area rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDLL and YFLD is Latitude field type.
LATORMNS
Array of up to 10 values defining the Latitude, minutes, of

LATORSCS
Array of up to 10 values defining the Latitude, seconds, of

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = POLYGON

POLYGONS C*24
MFDPOLY
POLYIDS
Name of the input vertex file. Used if SLCTSRCE =

POLYGON.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input vertex file.

Used if SLCTSRCE = POLYGON.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 10 Segment ID values defining the
Segment ID(s) of the polygon(s) to use. If POLYIDS = 0
or POLYIDS is omitted, then all the polygons in the input
vertex file are used, even if the number of polygons
exceed 10. Used if SLCTSRCE = POLYGON.
Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = DATA
DATAIN
R2003.12.0
C*24
Name of the input data file that defines the selected area
limits for this operation. Required if SLCTSRCE =
DATA.
DATAMFD
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input data file. Used
if SLCTSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = 0
DATAXFLD
Field number of the x or Longitude values in the input

data file. Used if SLCTSRCE = DATA.
DATAYFLD
Field number of the y or Latitude values in the input data

file. Used if SLCTSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = First field of the correct type to use.
Process
202
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = GRID
GRIDNAME C*24
MFDGRID
Name of the input grid file that defines the selected area
limits for this operation. Required if SLCTSRCE =
GRID.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input grid file.

Used if SLCTSRCE = GRID.
Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = PICTURE
PICTURE
C*80
Name of the picture that defines the selected area limits

for this operation. Required if SLCTSRCE = PICTURE.
ZGFNAME
C*80
Name of the graphics file that contains picture. Required

if SLCTSRCE = PICTURE.
Parameters
for Thinning Edit

A thinning edit selects points from a dataset of randomly spaced points
by retaining points based on where the record for the point is located in
the file, reducing the volume of data without regard for its spatial
distribution.
For a line-oriented dataset such as a seismic or fault dataset, the
thinning criteria can be applied on a line-by-line basis instead of on a
file basis. For example, you can specify that SELECT retain the first,
last, and every third point on each line in a file. SELECT uses the line
name or segment identifier field to determine where lines begin and
end on the file. You can specify a mask for the line name so that a
subset of the lines in a dataset can be thinned.
Due to the way SELECT determines where a line begins and ends, it is
important that a line-oriented file be properly sorted. For example, a
seismic data file must be sorted on line name as a primary sort field
followed by shotpoint number as a secondary sort field. SELECT
verifies that a file is properly sorted, but does not automatically sort the
file. The user is responsible for properly sorting a file using other
processes.
The sort order is important for seismic, fault, vertex (line), seismic
section, cross-section, and deviated well data. You can sort seismic
data using other processes; the other types of data must be loaded or
captured in the proper format and their order not changed.
R2003.12.0
Process
203
Landmark
If THINOPER is not defined, then the first elements of THINADDS,

THNRATES, and THNDISTS are used. If it is defined, then
THINOPER/THNTXTAS/THNTXTBS/THNVALAS/THNVALBS
are compared against the value of field LINIDFLD. If the comparison
passes, then the Nth THINADDS, THNRATES, and THNDISTS are
used on that line.
If the Nth element of THINOPER is a text field, then the Nth element
of THNTXTAS and (sometimes) the Nth element of THNTXTBS are
used. If the element of THINOPER is a numeric field, then the Nth
element of THNVALAS and (sometimes) the Nth element of
THNVALBS are used.
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
THINMODE C*20

Point selection mode.
Options:
NONE
ALL POINTS
= No thinning edit is performed.

= Retain point THINADDS plus every
THNRATESth point on the file.
Appropriate only for random data, i.e.,
well data or text files.
ENDPOINTS+RATE
= Retain endpoints plus every
THNRATESth point on each line,
beginning with point THINADDS.
Appropriate for line data.
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE
= Retain endpoints plus every point for
which the shotpoint number plus
THINADDS is evenly divisible by
THNRATES on each line. Appropriate
for seismic data only.
ENDPOINTS+DISTANCE
= Retain only points that are at least
THINDIST units from the prior
retained point for each line.
Appropriate for line data only.
R2003.12.0
THINADDS
Array of up to 10 points that define which point after the

previous end point is the next starting point.
Default Value = 1
THNRATES
Array of up to 10 point retention frequencies. Defines

which point to retain after the starting point.
Default Value = 2
Process
204
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
THNDISTS
Array of up to 10 minimum distances between retained

points, in map units. Used only if THINMODE =
ENDPOINTS+DISTANCE.
Default Value = 0.0
THINOPER
C*12
Comparison operation. If defined, only those lines are

thinned for which the value of field LINIDFLD satisfies
the comparison. See Valid Combinations on page 194
for further details.
Options:
EQ
= Keep values equal to THNTXTAS or

THNVALAS
NE
= Keep values not equal to THNTXTAS nor
THNVALAS
LT
= Keep values less than THNTXTAS or
THNVALAS
LE
= Keep values less than or equal to THNTXTAS
or THNVALAS
GT
= Keep values greater than THNTXTAS or
THNVALAS
GE
= Keep values greater than or equal to
THNTXTAS or THNVALAS
NULL = Keep values equal to the fields null value
NOTNULL
= Keep values not equal to the fields null
value
BETWEEN
= Keep values between the interval bounded
by THNTXTAS and THNTXTBS or
THNVALAS and THNVALBS
OUTSIDE
= Keep values outside the interval bounded
by THNTXTAS and THNTXTBS or
THNVALAS and THNVALBS
R2003.12.0
THNTXTAS C*80
Array of up to 10 primary text masks for line or area

identification. Required for all THINOPER operations on
text fields except NULL and NOTNULL.
THNTXTBS C*80
Array of up to 10 secondary text masks for line or area

identification, used with the text mask in the same
position in THNTXTAS. Each value must be greater than
the corresponding THNTXTAS value. Required if
RANGFLDS field is a text field and THINOPER =
BETWEEN or OUTSIDE.
THNVALAS
Array of up to 10 primary numeric values for line or area

identification. Required for all THINOPER operations on
numeric fields except NULL and NOTNULL.
Process
205
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
THNVALBS
DISCONTN
C*4

Array of up to 10 secondary numeric values for line or
area identification, used with the value in the same
position in THNVALAS. Each value must be greater than
the corresponding THNVALAS value. Required if
THINOPER = BETWEEN or OUTSIDE.
Use of discontinuity fields during the thinning process. If
these fields are used, then any point subjected to the
thinning algorithm that has any nonzero discontinuity
values passes the thinning criteria. Valid for line data, i.e.,
seismic, fault, vertex, contour, or deviated well data.
Default Value = NO
Options:
NO
YES
Parameters
= Do not use the discontinuity fields

= Use the discontinuity fields
for Range Editing specifying a condition on a field

You can select records from a dataset based on the value of a field on
each record. SELECT can compare the value of a field to a constant
VALUE using the comparison operators as discussed in Valid
Combinations on page 194. For the EQ and NE operators operating
on character fields, VALUE can contain wildcard parameters.
If the Nth element of RNGOPERS is a text field, then the Nth element
of RNGTXTAS and (sometimes) the Nth element of RNGTXTBS is
used. If the element of RNGOPERS is a numeric field, then the Nth
element of RNGVALAS and (sometimes) the Nth element of
RNGVALBS is used.
If you specify multiple range edit specifiers, SELECT uses them in the
following manner:
1.
Range Edit conditions that are specified on a common field are

combined into one range edit condition using a logical OR
operation, i.e., a record that satisfies one of the range edit
conditions satisfies the entire condition for that field.
2.
Range Edit conditions for distinct fields are combined using a

logical AND operation, i.e., the fields of a record must satisfy all
of the range edit conditions to retain in the output dataset. Any
composite Range Edit condition effected by case 1 above is treated
as a single Range Edit condition if considered with those for other
fields.
For maximum performance, the most stringent range edit

specifications should be first.
R2003.12.0
Process
206
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
RANGFLDS
Array of 10 field number(s) in the input file FILEIN for

which the range edit is performed. Multiple operations on
the same field are allowed.
RNGOPERS
C*12
Array of up to 10 comparison operations. Comparison is

performed on RANGFLDS field from the same array
position. See Valid Combinations on page 194 for
further details.
Options:
EQ
= Keep the values equal to RNGTXTAS or

RNGVALAS
NE
= Keep the values not equal to RNGTXTAS nor
RNGVALAS
LT
= Keep the values less than RNGTXTAS or
RNGVALAS
LE
= Keep the values less than or equal to
RNGTXTAS or RNGVALAS
GT
= Keep the values greater than RNGTXTAS or
RNGVALAS
GE
= Keep the values greater than or equal to
RNGTXTAS or RNGVALAS
BETWEEN = Keep the values between the interval
bounded by RNGTXTAS and
RNGTXTBS or RNGVALAS and
RNGVALBS
OUTSIDE
= Keep the values outside the interval
bounded by RNGTXTAS and
RNGTXTBS or RNGVALAS and
RNGVALBS
NULL
= Keep the values equal to the null values
of the field
NOTNULL = Keep the values not equal to the null
values of the field
R2003.12.0
RNGTXTAS C*80
Array of up to 10 primary text masks for line

identification. Used with RNGOPERS comparison on
RANGFLDS field from the same array position. Required
for all RNGOPERS operations on text fields.
RNGTXTBS C*80
Array of up to 10 secondary text masks for line

identification. Each value must be greater than the
corresponding RNGTXTAS value. Used with
RNGOPERS comparison on RANGFILDS field from the
same array position. Required if RANGFLDS field is a
text field and RNGOPERS = BETWEEN or OUTSIDE.
Process
207
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
RNGVALAS
Array of up to 10 primary numeric values for line

identification. Used with RNGOPERS comparison from
the same array position. Required for all RNGOPERS
operations on numeric fields except NULL and
NOTNULL.
RNGVALBS
Array of up to 10 secondary numeric values for line

identification. Each value must be greater than the
corresponding RNGVALAS value. Used with
RNGOPERS comparison from the same array position.
Required if RANGFLDS field is a numeric field and
RNGOPERS = BETWEEN or OUTSIDE.
Process
208
Landmark
Select Seismic Data To Post

Retrieve Seismic Data
The seismic data to post must be contained in an MFD and must
be of type DATA. The file specified by the user is opened.
Inspection of the field types in the file allows the process to
determine if the file is 2D seismic data or 3D seismic survey data.
If the data is not sorted correctly, the program issues a diagnostic
message and terminates. The valid sorts are shown in the
following table:
Data Type
2D
3D
Primary
Line Name
Line Number
3D Survey
3D Survey
Secondary
Shotpoint Number
Shotpoint Number
3D Line Number
3D Shotpoint Number
Tertiary
(none)
(none)
3D Shotpoint Number
3D Line Number
Select 2D Line(s)
If the user has specified POSTMODE = ALL, all 2D seismic
lines are sent through the posting process.
If the user has specified POSTMODE = SOME, the user must
specify at least one set of selection criteria (an operator and the
required masks). Each user-specified selection criteria is
compared to the specified Select Field. The Select Field must be
a Line Name or Line Number field. If a match is found, the data
is passed on to be posted, and the index of the matching selection
criteria is noted for future reference.
Select 3D Survey(s)
If the user has specified POSTMODE = ALL, all 3D seismic
surveys are sent through the posting process.
If the user has specified POSTMODE = SOME, the user must
specify at least one set of selection criteria (an operator and the
required masks). Each user-specified selection criteria is
compared to the specified Select Field. The Select Field must be
a 3D Survey Name field. If a match is found, the data is passed
on to be posted, and the index of the matching selection criteria is
noted for future reference.
R2003.12.0
Process
209
Landmark
Shaded Relief
Name
SHADED RELIEF
Alternate Name RELIEF SHADING

Function
This process creates a shaded relief grid. Once this grid is created, you
can run the contouring operation using the colorfill parameters and
display the picture.
Example
Azimuth of the sun:

Azimuth
0.0
Azimuth
Direction
North
180.0
South
45.0
Northeast
225.0
Southwest
90.0
East
270.0
West
Southeast
315.0
Northwest
135.0
Example
Direction
Conversion factor between vertical and horizontal units:

X & Y Units
Z Units
METER
METER
MILE
FOOT
Conversion
1.0
5280.0
If the units are not convertible, try to make the range in z about 1 3 of
the range in x and y. For example, if the range in x and y is about 1000
and the range in z is about 7, then (3*7)/1000 = 0.02 should be the
conversion factor.
R2003.12.0
Process
210
Landmark
Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
GRIDIN
C*24
MFDIN
Range

Name of the input grid to shade.
05

Default Value = 0
GRIDOUT
C*24
Name of output grid.

Default Value = Calculated; based on GRIDIN
MFDOUT
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output grid.

Default Value = 1
MINBRITE
0.0
1.0
Minimum brightness of a surface above the haze facing

away from the sun.
Default Value = 0.0
MAXBRITE
0.0
1.0
Maximum brightness of a surface above the haze facing

toward the sun.
Default Value = 1.0
ALTSUN
0.0
90.0
Altitude of the sun, in degrees, above the horizontal plane.

For maximum definition of detail, the suns rays should
be approximately parallel to the general trend of the
surface.
AZMSUN
0.0
360.0
Azimuth of the sun, clockwise from the north, in degrees.

See Example on page 210.
HAZEFACT
0.0
1.0
Haze factor. Zero is no haze; one destroys all contrast at

the lowest grid level.
Default Value = 0.0
CONVFACT
Conversion factor between vertical and horizontal units.

See Example on page 210.
Default Value = 1.0
Process
211
Landmark
Show Files
Name
SHOW FILES
Alternate Name LIST FILES

Function
This process lists all member files of a given type and/or file name
prefix for the MFDs currently attached. Output is to the system report
window by default; to change output, see REPTUNIT.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILETYPE
Data
Type
Range
C*4

Array of up to 10 types of files to list. See Appendix B.
File and Field Codes in the Z-MAP Plus Reference
manual for a complete list of Data File Type Codes.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
R2003.12.0
ALL
= All types.
GRID
= Grid files
DATA
= Data files
CNTR
= Contour files
FALT
= Fault files
VERT
= Vertex files
TEXT
= Text files
Process
212
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
PREFIX
C*24
List only files that have a name starting with this prefix.
Default Value = Blank, all file names
REPORT
C*8
Extent of the information to list.

Default Value = SUMMARY
Options:
SUMMARY
PARTIAL
FULL
REPTUNIT
R2003.12.0
0, 60
= List of the file name, file type and

size.
= List the file name, file type, size, and
file header.
= List the file name, file type, size,
header and field descriptions.
FORTRAN logical unit to which the listing is written.

Note: Zero causes the listing to be written to the screen
(in interactive executions). Any other value causes
the list to print to the run log file (in batch
executions).
Default Value = 0
Process
213
Landmark
Single Data Ops

Name
SINGLE DATA OPS
Alternate Name DATA TO DATA

Function
This process performs operations involving a single input field of a

control point file. Each use of this process creates a new data file. This
file contains all the fields and records of the input (old) data file, plus
the newly calculated field. The new field either replaces an existing
field or is added as a new field.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
INFLD
Range

05

Default Value = 0
Field number of the input field. This field must not be a
character field.
or
First numeric field, if no Z Value field is
available
Process
214
Landmark
Parameter
Name
OPNAME
Data
Type
C*8
Range

Name of data operation to perform.
Options:
SCALE
BIAS
SQUARE
POWER
=
=
=
=
Multiply each field value by PARAM.

Add PARAM to each field value.
Square each field value (second power).
Raise each field value to the PARAMth
SQROOT
ROOT
EXP
LN
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
SIN
COS
TAN
ATAN
NORM
LOG10
Take the square root of each field value.

Take the PARAMth root of each field
value.
Take the absolute value of each field
value.
Perform natural exponentiation.
Take the natural logarithm of each field
value.
Take the sine of each field value; values in
radians.
Take the cosine of each field value; values
in radians.
Take the tangent of each field value;
values in radians.
Take the arctangent of each field value;
values in radians.
Normalize the field by its mean and
standard deviation.
Take the common logarithm of each field
value.
power.
ABS
R2003.12.0
Process
215
Landmark
Parameter
Name
OPNAME
(contd)
Data
Type
C*8
Range

Options: (contd)
NORMMAX
NORMSIG
CLIPMAX
CLIPMIN
BLANKMAX
BLANKMIN
RECIPRCL
REPLZNON
REDFZNON
ROUND
FLOOR
CEIL
FIX
OUTFLD
R2003.12.0
= Normalize each field value by the

maximum value in the field, so that
the maximum value in the output
field is 1 (one).
= Normalize the field by its standard
deviation.
= Replace values greater than
PARAM with PARAM.
= Replace field values less than
PARAM with PARAM.
= Replace field values greater than
PARAM with ZNON.
= Replace field values less than
PARAM with ZNON.
= Take reciprocals of field values.
= Replace the null field values with
parameter ZNON.
= Redefine the fields null value with
parameter ZNON.
= Round each field value to the
nearest PARAM.
= Round the field value to the largest
integer that is less than or equal to
the field value.
= Round the field value to the
smallest integer that is greater than
or equal to the field value.
= Truncate each field value by
changing the value to the right of
the decimal point to 0.
Field number of the output field.

If N denotes the number of fields on the input control
point file, then legitimate values for the output field
would be from 0 to N+1 but not N+2.
A value of 0 or N+1 means that a new field is created; a
value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input control point file is replaced by this output field.
Note: You cannot replace a character field; you must
create a new one.
Default Value = 0, create a new field
Process
216
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
FLDNAME
C*20
Name for the output field.

Default Value = Old field name, if this z field is to replace
an existing field in the input file
or
Based on the field type of the new field, if the
output field is a new field
DATAOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
ZNON
PARAM
Range
05

Default Value = 1
Null data value for the output control point file.
Default Value = ZNON of input data file
Constant to use with an operation. Required if one of the
following operations (OPNAME) is specified
If the OPNAME is:
PARAM is:
SCALE
Multiplication factor
BIAS
Bias for addition
POWER
Value of exponent
ROOT
Value of N for Nth root
CLIPMAX
Upper threshold
CLIPMIN
Lower threshold
BLANKMAX
Upper threshold
BLANKMIN
Lower threshold
ROUND
Round off unit
Process
217
Landmark
Single Grid Ops

Name
SINGLE GRID OPS
Alternate Name GRID TO GRID

Function
This process performs operations involving a single input grid,

creating a new output grid.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
GRIDIN
C*24
MFDIN
OPNAME
C*8
Range

05

Default Value = 0
Name of data operation to perform.
Options:
SCALE
BIAS
SQUARE
POWER
SQROOT
ROOT
ABS
EXP
LN
LOG10
SIN
COS
TAN
ATAN
R2003.12.0
= Multiply each grid node value by

PARAM
= Add PARAM to each grid node value
= Square each grid node value
(second power)
= Raise each grid node value to the
PARAMth power
= Take the square root of each grid node
value
= Take the PARAMth root of each grid
node value
= Take the absolute value of each grid node
value
= Perform natural exponentiation on each
grid node value
= Take the natural logarithm of each grid
node value
= Take the common logarithm of each
grid node value
= Take the sine of each grid node value;
values in radians
= Take the cosine of each grid node value;
values in radians
= Take the tangent of each grid node value;
values in radians
= Take the arctangent of each grid value;
values in radians
Process
218
Landmark
Parameter
Name
OPNAME
(contd)
Data
Type
Range
C*8

Name of grid operation to perform.
Options: (contd)
SUBMEAN
RECIPRCL
NORMMAX
NORMSIG
NORM
CLIPMAX
CLIPMIN
BLANKMIN
BLANKMAX
DX2
DY2
DIPMAG
DIPAZM
REPLZNON
REDFZNON
R2003.12.0
GRIDOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
= Subtract the mean from each grid

node value
= Take reciprocals of each grid node
value
= Normalize th grid by its maximum
value.
= Normalize the grid by its standard
deviation.
= Normalize the grid by its mean and
standard deviation
= Replace values greater than PARAM
with PARAM
= Replace values greater than PARAM
with PARAM
= Replace each grid node value greater
than PARAM with ZNON.
= Replace each grid node value less
than PARAM with ZNON.
= Second derivative in x direction
= Second derivative in y direction
= Dip magnitude is the tangent of
the dip angle
= Dip azimuth angle is the direction of
dip measured from north clockwise
= Replace all grid ZNONs with
PARAM
= Redefine the grids null value with
parameter ZNON

05

Default Value = 1
Process
219
Landmark
Parameter
Name
PARAM
ZNON
FAULTS
MFDFAULT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
Constant to use with an operation. Required if one of the

following operations (OPNAME) is specified:
If the OPNAME is:
The PARAM is:
SCALE
Mulitplication factor
BIAS
Bias for addition
POWER
Value of exponent
ROOT
Value of N for Nth root
CLIPMAX
Upper threshold
CLIPMIN
Lower threshold
BLANKMAX
Upper threshold
BLANKMIN
Lower threshold
REPLZNON
z Value to replace grid ZNON

values
Null data value for the output grid.

Default Value = ZNON of input grid if OPNAME =
REDFZNON
or
1.0E30, otherwise
C*24
I

05

Default Value = 0
Process
220
Landmark
Sort
Name
SORT
Alternate Name
Function
This process sorts data in ascending and descending order, and

eliminates duplicate records. Up to ten sort fields can be specified; the
first field in the SORTFLDS array is the Primary Sort Field and any
other fields specified are Secondary Sort Fields. Data is sorted in
ascending or descending order with respect to the Primary Sort Field.
If the primary sort fields of two records have the same value, then
secondary sort fields are compared in the order specified until an
inequality is found. If two or more records have the same sort field
values, they are adjacent on the output file.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
SORTFLDS
NFIELDS
DATAOUT
MFDOUT
SRTORDRS
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range

05
C*12

Default Value = 0
Array of up to 10 field numbers of the fields to use for
sorting. These are the sort key fields.
Default Value = 1
110
C*24
I
Number of fields to sort.

Default Value = 1
05

Default Value = 1
Array of up to 10 entries specifying sorting order, in the
same position as the corresponding entry in SORTFLDS.
An entry of ASCENDING in the Nth position indicates
that the Nth SORTFLDS entry is sorted in ascending
order. If multiple fields are used (e.g., SORTLFDS =
1,2,3), then a combination of sort orders are allowed.
Default Value = ASCENDING
Options:
ASCENDING
DESCENDING
Process
221
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DUPRECRD C*12
Range

Method of handling duplicate records.
Default Value = STANDARD
Options:
STANDARD
= Allow sorted records to be written

regardless of duplicate field values.
= Check adjacent records for identical

field values in SORTFLDS fields;
eliminate the latter record.
NODUPVALU = Check adjacent records for identical
field values in all the fields;
eliminate the latter record.
NODUPKEYS
ORDREC
C*12
Method for handling record order.

Default Value = NOTEQUAL
Options:
= Records with identical sort key field
values retain their relative position
or order in the sorted output file.
NOTEQUAL = Check with identical sort key field
values do not retain their relative
position or order in the sorted output
file.
EQUAL
R2003.12.0
Process
222
Landmark
Spawn
Name
SPAWN
Alternate Name
Function
Parameters
Parameter
Name
This process initiates operating system commands from a ZCL run

during the execution phase (not the syntax checking phase) so that you
can execute operating system commands. This process is only effective
if the ZCL run is being executed interactively, while you are watching
it go by on the screen. To resume the ZCL run, use the normal logout
procedure for your computer.
Data
Type
COMMAND C*80
Range

System command.
For VAX/VMS systems, the value is a command such as
DIR, SET DEFAULT, RUN, etc.
For Unix systems, the value is a string that is interpreted
as if it had been typed as a command at the Unix prompt.
Parameters for VAX/VMS systems
R2003.12.0
FILEIN
C*80
Name of the input disk file that contains VAX/VMS

commands, one command per line. If blank, the
commands are taken from the terminal.
FILEOUT
C*80
Name of the output disk file to contain the VAX/VMS

output. If blank, output is directed to terminal.
RESUME
C*8
Whether the calling process continues executing in

parallel with the spawned subprocess.
Default Value = WAIT
Options:
= Calling process hibernates until
WAIT
subprocess completes.
=
Calling process continues to
NOWAIT
execute in parallel with the
subprocess.
Process
223
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
SYMBOLS
C*12
Passing of currently defined VAX symbols to the

spawned subprocess.
Default Value = PASSED
Options:
= Subprocess inherits all currently
PASSED
defined symbols.
=
Subprocess does not inherit
NOT
symbols.
PASSED
LOGICALS
C*12
Passing of VAX logical names to the spawned

subprocess.
Options:
PASSED
NOT
PASSED
R2003.12.0
= Subprocess inherits all currently

defined process logical names.
= Subprocess does not inherit logical
names.
NOTIFY
C*12
Broadcasting of a message to standard output if the

spawned subprocess completes or aborts.
Default Value = NO MESSAGE
Options:
MESSAGES
NO MESSAGES
KEYPAD
C*12
Passing of keypad symbols and state to the spawned

subprocess.
Options:
PASSED
NOT PASSED
PROCNAME C*15
Process name for spawned subprocess. Only unique

process names are allowed.
Default Value = ZCL_SPAWNED_UseNumber
PROMPT
Interactive system prompt to use for new subprocess.

Default Value = VAX
C*32
Process
224
Landmark
Squash MFD
Name
SQUASH MFD
Alternate Name COMPRESS MFD

Function
This process copies all member files not marked for deletion (by
DELETE FILE Process) from an old MFD to another MFD.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
MFDIN
MFDOUT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
05
Number of the MFD to copy member files from.
05
Number of the MFD to copy member files into.

Default Value = 1
Process
225
Landmark
Squash ZGF
Name
SQUASH ZGF
Alternate Name COMPRESS ZGF

Function
This process copies all pictures not marked for deletion (by DELETE
PICTURE Process) from an old graphics file to another graphics file.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
ZGFIN
C*80
Name of the graphics file to copy pictures from.
ZGFOUT
C*80
Name of the graphics file to copy pictures into.
Process
226
Landmark
Stop
Name
STOP
Alternate Name
Function
This process is used to end a ZCL job stream. There must be one for
every ZCL job stream.
Example
STOP:nn,mm
where nn is the use number and mm is the back reference number.

Parameters
R2003.12.0
No Parameters
Process
227
Landmark
Surface Intersect
Name
SURFACE INTERSECT
Alternate Name INTERSECT SURFS

Function
This process takes two grids as input and produces a vertex file that
represents the line of intersection.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
GRIDIN1
C*24
MFDIN1
GRIDIN2
C*24
MFDIN2
VERTICES
C*24
MFDOUT
Range

Name of the first input grid file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the first input grid file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input grid file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the second input grid

file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output vertex file.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output vertex file.

Default Value = 1
Process
228
Landmark
Surfaces Diagram
Name
SURFACES DIAGRAM
Alternate Name Z3D

Function
This process draws a Z-3D Surfaces diagram for up to 10 surfaces,

with or without faults.
If two or more surfaces are linked, the following parameters are
likewise linked:
z minimum and z maximum mapped into the box allocation

lower boundary of the box allocation
z scale
axis labeling parameters
box color index
This process supports two different methods of defining arrays, either

of which can be used for any array. In the first method, the array
elements are listed as part of the process command. For example,
FLTXFLD = 1,2,1 defines the first three elements in the fault X field
number array. In the second method, the array is stored in a Data Block
and referenced by the Data Blocks use number. For example,
DBFLTXFLD = 40 causes the fault X field numbers to be extracted
from DATA BLOCK 40, starting from the beginning of the Data
Block. All parameters referencing Data Block arrays have names with
the prefix DB. If a Data Block value is left empty the defaults are blank
for data type TEXT, and 0 for data type REAL or INTEGER.
If specifying these parameters for linked grids, in either a Data Block
or array, all values should be the same.
Notes
R2003.12.0

Process
229
Landmark
Example
DATA BLOCK: 40,00 HOWMANY = 3, DATATYPE = INTEGER, DATASIZE = 1,
VALUE = 1, 2, 1 /
SURFACES DIAGRAM: 10,00 GRIDIN = BOTTOM GRID, TOP GRID, FLAT
GRID,
FAULTS = BOTTOM GRID FAULTS,
DBFLTXFLD = 40,
GRDLINK = FLAT GRID, FLAT GRID,
AZIMUTH = 225.0, ELEVANGL = 15.0,
TOPCLR = 5, 4, 3, WTRCCLR = 4,
MESTOP = MESH, MESH, PERI,
MESBOT = MESH, MESH, PERI,
SKIRT = YES, BOX = NO,
BASEMAP = BASEMAP.BDF,
BDFGRD = FLAT GRID,
LGB1S = 3, 5, 6, 9, 12, 16,
LABELS = YES, YES, YES,
WELLFILE = DEV WELLS,
TRACEGRD = FLAT GRID,
LEGEND = UPPER LEFT /
Parameters
Parameter
Name
DBGRIDS
for input file

Data
Type
I
Range

Use number of the Data Block that contains the name of
up to 10 grids to display. Required if GRIDIN is not
specified.
The order of the grids in the Data Block indicates the
order of the surfaces in the box. The first is the lowest in
the box, the second is the next one up, etc. Grids that are
linked together are grouped together in the box and
ordered by their z values from lowest to highest.
The Data Block that contains the grids to display should have
the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 24
DBMFDGRD
Use number of the Data Block that contains the grid MFD
numbers.
The Data Block that contains the MFD numbers for the grids
should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
05
R2003.12.0
Process
230
Landmark
Parameter
Name
GRIDIN
Data
Type
Range
C*24
MFDGRD
DBGRDLNK

Array of up to 10 names of the grids to display. Required
if DBGRIDS is not specified.
The order of the grids in the array indicates the order of
the surfaces in the box. The first is the lowest in the box,
the second is the next one up, etc. Grids that are linked
together are grouped together in the box and ordered by
their z values from lowest to highest.
05
Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs that contains the

input grids, in the same position as the corresponding grid
in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 0
Use number of the Data Block that contains the link grid
names.
For example, if grids 1, 2, and 3 are link, the name of the
1st grid is placed in the 2nd and 3rd array positions of the
Data Block. Grids that are linked together are grouped
together in the box and ordered by their z values from
lowest to highest.
The Data Block that contains the link grid names should have
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 24
GRDLINK
DBFAULTS
C*24
Array of up to 10 names of the grids to link.

For example, if grids 1, 2, and 3 are linked, the name of
the 1st grid is placed in the 2nd and 3rd array positions of
GRDLINK. Grids that are linked together are grouped
together in the box and ordered by their z values from
lowest to highest.
Use number of the Data Block that contains the names of

the fault file for each grid, in the same position as the
corresponding grid listed in GRIDIN or DBGRIDS.
If a fault file is not required for one of the grids then its
position is left blank and a comma is used to hold that
position. If the same fault file is used for all grids, its
name must be entered once for each grid.
The Data Block that contains the names of the fault file for
each grid should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 24
R2003.12.0
Process
231
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DBMFDFLT
Data
Type
Range

Use number of the Data Block that contains the MFD
numbers for the fault files, in the same position as the
corresponding fault file listed in DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the MFD numbers of the fault
files should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
05
FAULTS
C*24
MFDFLT
DBFLTXFD
Array of up to 10 names of fault files for the grid in

GRIDIN or DBGRIDS, in the same position as the
corresponding grid.
If a fault file is not required for one of the grids then its
position is left blank and a comma is used to hold that
position. If the same fault file is used for all grids, its
name must be entered once for each grid.
05
Array of up to 10 numbers of the MFDs that contains the

input fault files, in the same position as the corresponding
fault file as listed in FAULTS.
Default Value = 0
Use number of the Data Block that contains the field
numbers of the X field in the fault files, in the same
position as the corresponding fault file as listed in
DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the fault X field numbers should
have the following structure:
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0
R2003.12.0
Process
232
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DBFLTYFD
Data
Type
I
Range

numbers of the Y field in the fault files, in the same
DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the fault Y field numbers should
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0
DBFLTZFD

numbers of the z field in the fault files, in the same
DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the fault Z field numbers should
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0
DBFLTIFD

numbers of the Segment ID field in the fault files, in the
same position as the corresponding fault file as listed in
DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the fault Segment ID numbers
for the grids should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0
FLTXFLD
R2003.12.0
Array of up to 10 field numbers of the X field in the fault

files, in the same position as the corresponding fault file
as listed in FAULTS.
Process
233
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
FLTYFLD
Array of up to 10 field numbers of the Y field in the fault

files, in the same position as the corresponding fault file
as listed in FAULTS.
FLTZFLD
Array of up to 10 field numbers of the Z Value field in the

fault files, in the same position as the corresponding fault
file as listed in FAULTS.
FLTIFLD
Array of up to 10 field numbers of the Segment ID field in

the fault files, in the same position as the corresponding
fault file as listed in FAULTS.
Parameters for box orientation and dimensions

AZIMUTH
ELEVANGL
0.0
360.0
Angle measured clockwise from north of the viewing

position, in degrees. The default viewpoint (i.e., the point
in the box on which the view is centered) is the center of
the box.
90.0
Angle above the horizontal of the viewing position, in
through degrees.
90.0
R2003.12.0
RANGE
>0.0 Relative distance of the viewing position away from the

9999.0 center of the box.
XSCALE
>0.0
Scale of the x axis for all grids.

Default Value = Based upon grid x range
YSCALE
>0.0
Scale of the y axis for all grids.

Default Value = Based upon grid y range
BZMIN
Minimum z coordinate of the box in box coordinates.

Default Value = Minimum box coordinate of all grids
BZMAX
Maximum z coordinate of the box in box coordinates.

Default Value = Maximum box coordinate of all grids
Process
234
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DBWZMIN
Range

Use number of the Data Block that contains the world
coordinate z values at the base of each grids box
allocation, in the same position as the corresponding grid
as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids base z value should
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
DBWZMAX
Use number of the Data Block that contains the world

coordinate z values at the top of each grids box
allocation, in the same position as the corresponding grid
The Data Block that contains the grids top z value should
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
R2003.12.0
WZMIN
Array of up to 10 world coordinates of the base of each

grids box allocation, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = MIN (z grid value for grid or group of
linked grids including ZNON replacement
value) plus a spacing buffer, based on the total z
range of all grids
WZMAX
Array of up to 10 world coordinates of the top of each

Default Value = MAX (z grid value for grid or group of
linked grids including ZNON replacement
value) plus a spacing buffer, based on the total z
range of all grids
Process
235
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DBBGZMIN
Data
Type
I
Range

Use number of the Data Block that contains the box
coordinate of the base of each grids box allocation, in the
same position as the corresponding grid as listed in
DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids base box coordinate
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
DBZSCALE
Use number of the Data Block that contains the z scale for
each grid, in the same position as the corresponding grid
If the z scale for a grid is set to zero, then the box
allocation for the grid has a height of zero, effectively
flattening the grid.
The Data Block that contains the grids z scale should have
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
>0
DBZNNRPL
Use number of the Data Block that contains the ZNON

replacement value for each grid, in the same position as
the corresponding grid as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids ZNON replacement
value should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
BGZMIN
R2003.12.0
Array of up to 10 box coordinates of the base of each

Default Value = 0.0
Process
236
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
0
ZSCALE
Array of up to 10 z scales, in the same position as the

If the z scale for a grid is set to zero, then the box
allocation for the grid has a height of zero, effectively
flattening the grid.
Default Value = Based upon z range of all grids
ZNNRPL
Array of up to 10 ZNON replacement values, in the same

position as the corresponding grid as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = Grid z minimum value
VIEWFACT
>0.0 Relative size of the diagram. This is the length of the

1.0
longest axis of the box in units of RANGE. Increasing or
decreasing VIEWFACT changes the overall size of the
diagram without changing its perspective view.
Parameters for colors

DBBOXCLR
Use number of the Data Block that contains the color

index to use to draw the enclosing box for each grid, in
the same position as the corresponding grid as listed in
DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids box color index
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0255
DPTOPCLR

index to use to draw the top of each grid mesh, in the
DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids top mesh color index
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0255
R2003.12.0
Process
237
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DBBOTCLR
Data
Type
I
Range

index to use to draw the bottom of each grid mesh, in the
DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids bottom mesh color
index should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0255
DBZNNCLR

index to use to draw the ZNON area(s) of each grid, in the
same position as the corresponding grid in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids ZNON color index
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0255
DBFLTCLR

index to use to draw the fault traces of each grid, in the
same position as the corresponding grid in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids fault trace color index
DATATYPE = INTEGER
DATASIZE = 1
0255
BOXCLR
R2003.12.0
0255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the enclosing box for

as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 1
Process
238
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
TOPCLR
0255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the top of each grid

mesh, in the same position as the corresponding grid as
listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 1
BOTCLR
ZNNCLR
0255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the bottom of each grid

mesh, in the same position as the corresponding grid as
listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 3
0255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the ZNON area(s) of
as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 4
FLTCLR
0255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the fault traces for each
grid, in the same position as the corresponding grid as
listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 2
SKTTCLR
0255 Color index for the exterior of the skirt below the bottom
surface.
Default Value = 1
SKTBCLR
0255 Color index for the interior of the skirt below the bottom
surface.
Default Value = 3
WTRCCLR
0255 Color index for well traces.

Default Value = 5
Parameters for drawing

DBMESTOP
Use number of the Data Block that contains the draw

option for each grids top, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids top drcd TESTaw
option should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 12
Options for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
MESH
= Draw grid mesh
PERIMETER = Draw only grid perimeter
R2003.12.0
Process
239
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DBMESBOT
Data
Type
I
Range

Use number of the Data Block that contains the draw
option for each grids bottom, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grids bottom draw option
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 12
MESH
= Draw grid mesh
PERIMETER = Draw only grid perimeter
MESTOP
C*12
Array of up to 10 options for drawing the top of each grid,

in the same position as the corresponding grid listed in
GRIDIN.
Default Value = MESH
Options:
= Draw a grid mesh
MESH
PERIMETER
MESBOT
C*12
Array of up to 10 options for drawing the bottom of each

grid, in the same position as the corresponding grid listed
in GRIDIN.
Default Value = MESH
Options:
= Draw a grid mesh
MESH
PERIMETER
R2003.12.0
= Draw only grid perimeters
= Draw only grid perimeters
TRIANGLE
C*4
Triangulation of unfaulted surfaces. All faulted surfaces

are automatically triangulated.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO
SKIRT
C*4
Drawing of a skirt below the bottom surface.

Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO
Process
240
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
HIDNLINE
C*4
Performance of hidden line removal.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO
BOX
C*4
Drawing of enclosing box.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO
ARROW
C*4
Drawing of North arrow on the top of the box. The value

of ARROW is ignored unless BOX = YES.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO
Parameters for Basemap Detail
DBBMAPS

the Basemap Detail files from which features are selected
for drawing.
The Data Block that contains the Basemap Detail file names
HOWMANY = Number of Basemap Detail files
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 80
DBBDFGRD

the grid on which each basemap is draped, in the same
position as the corresponding Basemap Detail file listed
in DBBMAPS. Required if more than one grid is in the
surface diagram and DBBMAPS is specified.
The Data Block that contains the names of the grids on which
to drape Basemap Detail should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of Basemap Detail files
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 24
R2003.12.0
Process
241
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DBBDFDRW
Data
Type
I
Range

Use number of the Data Block specifying where on the
surfaces the basemap detail is drawn, in the same position
as the corresponding Basemap Detail file listed in
DBBMAPS.
The Data Block specifying where the basemap detail is to
be drawn on each grid should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 8
TOP
= Draw on top only
BOTTOM = Draw on bottom only
BOTH
= Draw on both top and bottom
DBLGBS
Array of up to 10 use numbers of the Data Blocks that

contain the graphics features to draw from each Basemap
Detail file, in the same position as the corresponding file
listed in GRIDIN
The Data Block that contains the graphics features for each
Basemap Detail file should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number graphics features to
draw
DATATYPE = Integer
DATASIZE = 1
Range options for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
11000
= Draw that feature
0
= Ignore
<0
= Draw all features
BASEMAP
BDFGRD
R2003.12.0
C*80
Array of up to 10 names of Basemap Detail files from

which graphics features are selected for drawing, in the
same position as the corresponding grid in GRIDIN.
C*80
Array of up to 10 names of grids on which Basemap

Detail is draped, in the same position as the corresponding
Basemap Detail file as listed in BASEMAP. Required if
more than one grid is in the surfaces diagram and
BASEMAP is specified.
Process
242
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
BDFDRW
C*8
LGBS1S
Range

Array of up to 10 options specifying on which grid mesh
the basemap detail is drawn.
Options:
= Draw on top only
TOP
BOTTOM
= Draw at bottom only
BOTH
= Draws on top and bottom
Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the

first Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options:
11000
0
<0
R2003.12.0
= Draw that feature

= Ignore
= Draw all features
LGBS2S

second Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Range Options: same as LGBS1S
LGBS3S

third Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
LGBS4S

fourth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
LGBS5S

fifth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
LGBS6S

sixth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Process
243
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
LGBS7S

seventh Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
LGBS8S

eighth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
LGBS9S

ninth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
LGBS10S

tenth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Parameters for axis labeling

DBLABELS
C*4
Array of up to 10 entries specifying whether the x, y, and z

axis of the box are labeled. The value of DBLABELS is
ignored if BOX = NO.
Note: The x and y axis labels are drawn only if the z axis
of one or more of the grids is labeled.
The Data Block that contains the axis label option should
DATATYPE = TEXT
DATASIZE = 4
YES
= Label axes
NO
= No axes labeled
R2003.12.0
Process
244
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
LABELS
C*4
Array of up to 10 entries specifying whether the x, y, and z

axis of the box are labeled. The value of LABELS is
ignored if BOX = NO.
Note: The x and y axis labels are drawn only if the z axis
of one or more of the grids is labeled.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO
XMINLABL
Minimum value to label on x axis.

Default Value = Based upon the x limits of the grids
Range Options:
minimum x of grids through maximum x of grids
XMAXLABL
Maximum value to label on x axis.

Range Options:
XMINLABL through maximum x of grids
XSIZLABL
> 0.0
Size of x axis labels in terms of x engineering coordinates.

Default Value = (WXMAX WXMIN) / 50.0
XINCLABL
> 0.0
Labeling increment for x axis.

XDECIMAL
08
Number of decimal places in the posted x axis labels.

YMINLABL
Minimum value to label on the y axis.

Default Value = Based upon the y limits of the grids
Range Options:
minimum y of grids through maximum y of grids
YMAXLABL
Maximum value to label on the y axis.

Range Options:
YMINLABL through maximum y of grids
YSIZLABL
> 0.0
Size of y axis labels expressed in terms of x engineering

coordinates.
Process
245
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
YINCLABL
> 0.0
The y axis labeling increment.

YDECIMAL
08
Number of decimal places in the posted y axis labels.

Default Value = Based upon the y limits of the grid
DBZMINLB
Use number of the Data Block that contains the minimum

value to label on the z axis.
The Data Block that contains the minimum z axis label
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
DBZMAXLB
Use number of the Data Block that contains the maximum

value to label on the z axis.
The Data Block that contains the maximum z axis label
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
DBZINCLB
Use number of the Data Block that contains the z axis

labeling increment.
The Data Block that contains the z axis labeling increment
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
DBZSIZLB
Use number of the Data Block that contains the size of z

axis labels in terms of x engineering coordinates.
The Data Block that contains the size of z axis labels should
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
R2003.12.0
Process
246
Landmark
Parameter
Name
DBZDECML
Data
Type
Range

Use number of the Data Block that contains the number of
decimal places in the posted z axis labels.
The Data Block that contains the number of decimal places
for z axis labels should have the following structure:
DATATYPE = REAL
DATASIZE = 1
08
R2003.12.0
ZMINLABL
Array of up to 10 minimum values to label on the z axis,

in the same position as the corresponding grid in
GRIDIN.
Default Value = Based upon the z limits mapped into the
box allocation for the grid
Range Options:
minimum z of allocated region through
maximum z of allocated region
ZMAXLABL
Array of up to 10 maximum values to label on the z axis,

in the same position as the corresponding grid in
GRIDIN.
Range Options:
ZMINLABL through
maximum z of allocated region
ZINCLABL
>0
Array of up to 10 increments for z axis labels, in the same

position as the corresponding value in ZMINLABL.
ZSIZLABL
>0
Array of up to 10 sizes of z axis labels expressed in terms

of x engineering coordinates, in the same position as the
corresponding value in ZMINLABL.
ZDECIMAL
08
Array of up to 10 numbers of decimal places in the posted

z axis labels, in the same position as the corresponding
value in ZMINLABL.
Process
247
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
Parameters for well traces

WELLFILE
C*24
MFDWELL
TRACEGRD C*24
Name of the deviated well file.

05
Number of the MFD that contains the deviated well file.

Name of the grid with which the well traces are
associated. Required if WELLFILE is specified and more
than one grid is in the surfaces diagram.
Parameters for legend

LEGEND
C*12
Location of legend.
Options:
= Specify upper left corner and lower
USER
right corner coordinates of a
legend
=
Draw no legend.
OMIT
UPPER LEFT
= Locate legend in upper left margin
LOWER LEFT = Locate legend in lower left

margin.
=
Locate legend in upper right
UPPER RIGHT
margin.
=
Locate legend in lower right
LOWER
margin.
RIGHT
R2003.12.0
XUPPLEFT
The x coordinate of upper left corner of legend, in plotter

units (in or cm). Required if LEGEND = USER.
YUPPLEFT
The y coordinate of upper left corner of legend, in plotter

XLOWRGHT
The x coordinate of lower right corner of legend, in plotter

YLOWRGHT
The y coordinate of lower right corner of legend, in plotter

Process
248
Landmark
Syntax Only
Name
SYNTAX ONLY
Alternate Name SYNTAX

Function
This process instructs ZCL to only check for syntactical errors during
the initial scan of the ZCL command stream. It does not check
parameter values, file existence or file type. It does check parameter
and process name spelling, process terminator, commas, and whether
parameter values are of the correct type (R, I, D or C).
If this process occurs in a command stream, then no part of that stream
executes. The primary use for this process is for syntactical debugging
if the files needed as input for a command stream do not yet exist.
R2003.12.0
Example
SYNTAX ONLY:
Parameters
No Parameters
Process
249
Landmark
System Parms
Name
SYSTEM PARMS
Alternate Name
Function
Flags or switches that affect the mode of operation of ZCL are set by
this process. The UNITS flag switches between an English units
environment (inches) and a metric units environment (centimeters) for
picture and plotted features set up.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
UNITS
C*8

Type of units for picture and plot environments.
Subsequent defaults and ranges are calculated according
to this setting.
Default Value = ENGLISH
Options:
ENGLISH = Sets units to inches
METRICS = Sets units to centimeters
Process
250
Landmark
Text
Name
TEXT
Alternate Name TXT

Function
This process posts text data from the parameter TEXT onto the current
picture.
Notes
The PICTURE Process must be used to open a graphics file and picture
before this process is used.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
TEXT
C*80
Range

Text string to post.
The x location of text, in plotter units (in or cm).

The y location of text, in plotter units (in or cm).

FONT
COLOR
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
C*8
Type font to use. See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and

Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual for
examples of font types.
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
0255 Color index for the text.
Default Value = 7
Process
251
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CHARSIZE
ROTATE
LOCATE
C*12
Range

Height of characters, in plotter units (in or cm).
0.0
360.0
Orientation of text with respect to the horizontal (positive

x axis), measured counterclockwise in degrees.
Method for locating text string.
Options:
LOWER LEFT
Place text in lower left corner.
LOWER RIGHT
Place text in lower right

corner.
CENTER
Center text.
Process
252
Landmark
Thin Text Fields

Name
THIN TEXT FIELDS
Alternate Name REMOVE CHAR DUPS

Function
This process eliminates multiple labeling for a particular value of an

attribute.
One application of this process is labeling the operator for only one
well on a platform, if all of the operators are the same.
The file must be sorted with this field as the first or second key text
field.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
DATAOUT
MFDOUT
FIELDS
I
I

Name of the input file.
05
C*24
FLDNAMES C*20
R2003.12.0
Range

Default Value = 0
Default Value = Based on the input data file name
05

Default Value = 1
Array of up to 10 field numbers of character fields to thin.
Array of up to 10 names for the new fields that contains
the thinned data. The order of this array must correspond
to the order of input fields.
Default Value = Input field names
Process
253
Landmark
Thinning
Name
THINNING
Alternate Name THIN

Function
This process thins a data file by only keeping records that pass
specified criteria, such as line/area name or windowing the Area of
Interest (AOI).
Valid Combinations for input fields if THINMODE = ALL LINES

Fields
LINE
X-FIELD Y-FIELD SEG ID
File Type
NAME
FALT
Req
VERT
Req
CNTR
Req
Req
XSEC
Req
SSEC/PROF
Req
DATA *
Opt
Opt
* For a data file at least one of these fields must be present
HORIZON
NAME
Opt
Valid Combinations for input fields if THINMODE = SINGLE LINE or SINGLE

AREA.
Fields
SHOTPOINT
LINE NAME
AREA NAME
THINMODE
NUMBER
SINGLE LINE
Req
Opt*
SINGLE AREA
Req
Opt*
* The Shotpoint Number field is Required if METHOD = DIVISIBLE
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
MFDIN
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
C*24
FILEOUT
C*24
MFDOUT

Name of input file.
Range Options:
Data, contour, fault, vertex, cross-section and
seismic-section files
05

Default Value = 0
05

Default Value = 1
Process
254
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
THINMODE C*12
Range

Type of thinning to perform.
Default Value = ALL LINES
Options:
= Entire dataset with regard to lines.
Appropriate for seismic/profile,
vertex, fault, seismic-section,
cross-section, and contour lines.
=
Entire dataset without regard to
ALL POINTS
lines. Appropriate for scattered
data.
=
In a single line specified by line
SINGLE
name.
LINE
= In an area specified by area name.
SINGLE
AREA
Thinning algorithm. Used if THINMODE = ALL LINES
or ALL POINTS.
Options:
ALL LINES
METHOD
C*12
NORMAL
DIVISIBLE
LINEAREA
R2003.12.0
= Pick every DINCR shotpoint starting

with point STARTPNT.
= Pick every shotpoint whose shotpoint
number is evenly divisible by DINCR.
This option is valid only if the input
file is a data file
C*80
Line or area name. Required if THINMODE = SINGLE

LINE or SINGLE AREA.
STARTPNT
Starting point to delete. If THINMODE = ALL LINES,

then the first and last points are kept.
Default Value = 1
DINCR
Increment for deleting and the divisor if THINMODE =

SINGLE LINE and METHOD = DIVISIBLE. Valid
Combinations on page 254 shows which fields are
required for a given mode of operation.
Note: A Shotpoint Number field is Required if
METHOD = DIVISIBLE.
Default Value = 2
XFLD

Process
255
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
YFLD

SHTPTFLD
Field number of the Shotpoint Number field.

Default Value = First Shotpoint Number field
LINIDFLD
Field number of the Segment ID field in line file.

LINNMFLD
Field number of the Line Name field.

HORNMFLD
Field number of the Horizon Name field.

Default Value = First Horizon Name field
ARENMFLD
Field number of the Area Name field.

Default Value = First Area Name field
WINFLDS
Array of up to 10 numbers of fields to use for windowing

the file. Required if the data in the file is windowed.
Note: Only points falling in the window specified by
WINMINS & WINMAXS are subjected to the
thinning algorithm.
WINMINS
Array of up to 10 values for the minimum window limit,

in the same position as the corresponding WINFLDS field
being windowed. Required if the data in the file is
windowed.
WINMAXS
Array of up to 10 values for the maximum window limit,

in the same position as the corresponding WINFLDS field
being windowed. Required if the data in the file is
windowed.
Process
256
Landmark
Three D Time To Depth

Name
THREE D TIME TO DEPT
Alternate Name T T D I
Function
This process performs time-to-depth conversion using a pseudo

three-dimensional grid model. Velocity values are interpolated at the
time positions recorded in the input time grid.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
VELOGRID
C*24
MFDVELO
TIMEGRID
C*24
MFDTIME
Range

Name of the input file that contains the pseudo
three-dimensional input velocity grid.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input

three-dimensional velocity grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains the time grid.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input time grid.

Default Value = 0
TIMETOP
Time to first velocity layer.
TIMEBOT
Time at bottom velocity layer.
TIMEDEL
Delta time between velocity layers.
GRIDOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
Name of the output grid of interpolated velocities.

05
Number of the MFD to contain output grid of interpolated

velocities.
Default Value = 1
Process
257
Landmark
Three D Timeslice
Name
THREE D TIMESLICE
Alternate Name TSLICE

Function
This process creates a pseudo three-dimensional grid file in the special

timeslice format by concatenating ZIMS grid files in normal or
timeslice format. The output is a grid file in the special timeslice
format that can be used as input to the THREE D TIME TO DEPT
Process.
Each input grid must have the same increments and minimums for x
and Y, and the same maximum Y. Every regular grid, except for the
timeslices, must also have the same maximum X. These files must be
entered in the order required by the THREE D TIME TO DEPT
Process. The grids must be evenly spaced in time and are concatenated
sequentially from shallow to deep.
The optional top slice grid in special timeslice format can be followed
by at most 30 grids in normal format and finally by an optional bottom
slice grid in special timeslice format.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TOPSLICE
C*24
MFDTOP
GRIDIN
MFDGRDS
R2003.12.0
Range
Name of the input top, the most shallow, timeslice grid.

See discussion in the Function section.
05
C*24
Number of the MFD that contains the top timeslice grid.

Default Value = 0
Array of up to 30 names of normal input grid files to use
in the creation of the timeslice. See discussion in the
Function section.
05

input grids in the same sequential list position as the
corresponding input grid in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 0
Process
258
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
BOTSLICE
C*24
MFDBOT
GRIDOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
Range

Name of the input bottom (deepest) timeslice grid. See
discussion in the Function section.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the bottom timeslice

grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output timeslice grid.
Default Value = Based on the first grid file name
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output timeslice grid.

Default Value = 1
Process
259
Landmark
Time Migration
Name
TIME MIGRATION
Alternate Name TIME MIGR

Function
This process performs forward or reverse time migration using normal

ray tracing through a single layer. The algorithm is described in
Krigeage Applied to Geophysics in Geophysical Prospecting 24.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TIMEGRID
C*24
MFDTIME
VELOGRID
C*24
MFDVELO
TIMEFALT
C*24
MFDTFLT
VELOFALT
C*24
MFDVFLT
DATAIN
MFDDATA
Range
Name of the time horizon grid.

05
05
R2003.12.0
Number of the MFD that contains the velocity grid.

Default Value = 0
Name of the time horizon fault file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the time horizon fault

file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the velocity fault file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the velocity fault file.

Default Value = 0
05
TDATAOUT C*24
MFDTDATA
Number of the MFD that contains the time horizon file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the velocity grid.
C*24
I

file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output grid node data file.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output grid node data

file.
Default Value = 1
Process
260
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
VECTOUT
C*24
MFDVECT
Range
Name of the output vector file.

05
ODATAOUT C*24
MFDODATA
TFLTOUT
C*24
MFDTOUT
DATAOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
R2003.12.0
Number of the MFD to contain the output vector file.

Default Value = 1
Name of the output over migration grid node data file.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output over migration

grid node data file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output time fault file. Used if there are time
horizon faults involved.
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output time fault file.

Default Value = 1
Name of the output control point file. Used if there are
control points to migrate/unmigrate.
05
FDATAOUT C*24
MFDFDATA

file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output control point migration/unmigration
failure file.
05

failure file.
Default Value = 1
DIRECT
C*8
Direction of migration.
Default Value = FORWARD
Options:
FORWARD
REVERSE
TIMETYPE
C*12
Type of time used.

Default Value = ONE WAY TIME
Options:
ONE WAY TIME
TWO WAY TIME
Process
261
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TIMEUNIT
C*12
Time units.
Default Value = SECONDS
Options:
SECONDS
MILLISECONDS
FILLGAP
C*8
Method for handling fault segments that cannot be

migrated.
Default Value = BREAK
Options:
= Connect across the missing fault
CONNECT
segments
=
Break fault into two segments
BREAK
SAMPRATE C*8
R2003.12.0
Range
Sampling rate for migrating time horizon faults.

Default Value = COARSEST
Options:
COARSEST = 1 point per grid increment
COARSE
= 2 points per grid increment
MEDIUM
FINE
XFLD
Field number of the X field in the input control point file.

YFLD
Field number of the Y field in the input control point file.

ZFLD
Field number of the Z Value field in the input control

point file that is to be overwritten.
Default Value = 0, create a new Z Value field
FLDNAME
C*20
Name of the Z Value field for the output control point file
if a new file is created.
Default Value = MIGRATED TIME
Process
262
Landmark
Title Block
Name
TITLE BLOCK
Alternate Name T BLK

Function
This process draws a title block on the plot. The title block has room
for up to five lines of title text, plus space for the plot author, the plot
scale, a file number, the company name, and the company location.
The size of the lettering is proportional to the height of the title block.
Notes
The PICTURE Process must be used to open a graphics file and picture
before this process is used.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TITLE1
C*80
First line of title text.

TITLE2
C*80
Second line of title text.

TITLE3
C*80
Third line of title text.

TITLE4
C*80
Fourth line of title text.

TITLE5
C*80
Fifth line of title text.

AUTHOR
C*20
Text naming the author.

SCALE
C*20
Text to put in the scale area of the title block.

FILENUM
C*20
Text to put in the file number area of the title block.

COMPANY
C*80
Text name of the company.

COLOCATE C*80
R2003.12.0
Range
Text naming the location of the company.

Process
263
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
XLOWLEFT
YLOWLEFT
HEIGHT
Height of the title block, in plotter units (in or cm).

This must be less than or equal to the y offset for the
picture (as described in YBMARGIN of PICTURE
Process parameters for map dimensions on page 28)
unless XLOWLEFT and YLOWLEFT are specified.
Default Value = Bottom margin of the picture minus 1 in
or 2.5 cm
C*12
Method for locating the title block.

Default Value = LOWER RIGHT
Options:
LOWER LEFT = Place title block in lower left corner;
it is placed in y offset area.
LOWER RIGHT = Place title in lower right corner; it
is placed in y offset area.
ARBITRARY = Let XLOWLEFT, YLOWLEFT specify
the x and y positions of the lower left corner of the
LOCATION
The x position for the title block lower left corner, in

plotter units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION =
ARBITRARY.
The y position for the title block lower left corner, in
plotter units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION =
ARBITRARY.
title block in plotter units (in or cm). Position title

block anywhere in map limits/offsets.
R2003.12.0
Process
264
Landmark
Transform Coords
Name
TRANSFORM COORDS
Alternate Name T COORD

Function
This process transforms x and y coordinates to Latitude and Longitude

coordinates, and the inverse. The transformation is controlled by the
projection set up with the PROJECTION Process. The output data file
contains X and Y fields or Longitude and Latitude fields, depending on
the direction of the transformation.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
MFDIN
Range
C*24
I
FILEOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
DIRECT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
C*4

05

Default Value = 0
05

Default Value = 1
Direction of the transformation.
Default Value = LLXY
Options:
LLXY = Latitude/Longitude to X/Y
XYLL = X/Y to Latitude/Longitude
INFLDN
Field number of the field in the input data file that

contains Latitude or y values.
INFLDE
Field number of the field in the input data file that

contains Longitude or x values.
Process
265
Landmark
Parameter
Name
OUTFDNLT
Data
Type
I
Range

Field number of the output field that will receive Latitude or y
values.
If N denotes the number of fields on the input control point file,
then legitimate values for the output field would be from 1 to
N+2 (If OUTFDNLT is N+1 then OUTFDELN should be N+2.
The reverse is also true.)
The value of 0 or N+1 (or N+2) means that a new field is created; a value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input file is replaced by this output field.
Default Value = 0, create new field
OUTFDELN
Field number of the output field that will receive Longitude or x

values.
If N denotes the number of fields on the input control point file,
then legitimate values for the output field would be from 1 to
N+2 (If OUTFDNLT is N+2 then OUTFDELN should be N+1.
The reverse is also true.)
The value of 0 or N+1 (or N+2) means that a new field is created; a value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input file is replaced by this output field.
Default Value = 0, create new field
R2003.12.0
FLDNAMEN C*20
Name of the output field to receive Latitude or y values.

Default Value = Standard name for the type of field being
created
FLDNAMEE C*20
Name of the output field to receive Longitude or x values.

Default Value = Standard name for the type of field being
created
ZNON
Null data value for the file being created.

Default Value = ZNON value of the input file
Process
266
Landmark
Trend Gridding
Name
TREND GRIDDING
Alternate Name TREND

Function
This process builds a grid representing a mathematical function having

a specified number of terms (NTERMS).
This grid may or may not represent the classic Nth degree trend
surface, depending upon whether the correct number of terms have
been selected. Input for building the function and resulting grid can be
either a data file or another grid.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
C*24
MFDIN
INFLD

Name of the input grid or control point file.
05

Default Value = 0
Field number of the desired field in the control point file.
GRIDOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
05

Default Value = 1
NTERMS
128
Number of terms in the output trend grid, e.g., a linear

surface has 3 terms.
Default Value = 3, linear surface
XMIN
Minimum x coordinate of the grid area.

the actual minimum x value of the data
XMAX
Maximum x coordinate of the grid area.

the actual maximum x value of the data
YMIN
Minimum y coordinate of the grid area.

the actual minimum y value of the data
Process
267
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
YMAX
Maximum y coordinate of the grid area.

the actual maximum y value of the data
XINC
The x increment for the output grid. Used if the input is a

data file.
Default Value = For grid file, XINC from the input grid
file
or
For data file,
( XMAX XMIN ) ( YMAX YMIN )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------number of points in file
R2003.12.0
YINC
The y increment for the output grid.

Default Value = For grid file, YINC from the input grid
file
or
For data file, XINC
ZMIN
Minimum grid value allowed during the grid creation

phase.
ZMAX
Maximum grid value allowed during the grid creation

phase.
NXBLOCKS
The x block factor if Block Averaging the input grid.

By specifying a value for either NXBLOCKS or
NYBLOCKS, you imply that you do want to Block
Average the input grid. This value must be at least 1.
If both NXBLOCKS and NYBLOCKS are 1, there is no
Block Average effect.
If NXBLOCKS is specified but NYBLOCKS is not,
NYBLOCKS defaults to a value of 1.
Default Value = 1
NYBLOCKS
The y block factor if Block Averaging the input grid.

By specifying a value for either NXBLOCKS or
NYBLOCKS, you imply that you do want to Block
Average the input grid. This value must be at least 1.
If both NXBLOCKS and NYBLOCKS are 1, there is no
Block Average effect.
If NYBLOCKS is specified but NXBLOCKS is not,
NXBLOCKS defaults to a value of 1.
Default Value = NXBLOCKS
Process
268
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
MEANDISP
C*16
Display of residual absolute normalized mean and

standard deviation.
Default Value = DISPLAY MEAN
Options:
DISPLAY MEAN = Display mean information
NO DISPLAY MEAN = Do not display mean
information
RESIDISP
C*16
Display of residual as a fraction of the standard deviation.

Default Value = DISPLAY RESID
Options:
DISPLAY RESID = Display residual information
NO DISPLAY RESID = Do not display residual
information
Process
269
Landmark
Tri Scaling
Name
TRI SCALING
Alternate Name SCALE XY

Function
This process converts the x, y coordinates of a dataset to another x, y

coordinate system using triangulation scaling.
Triangulation scaling is used to transform the x, y coordinates of a
dataset to another x, y coordinate system. Between 3 and 500 scaling
points can be provided to define the triangulation scaling lattice.
For each data point to convert, the lattice triangle that contains the
point (or the closest triangle if the point is outside the lattice) is found
and its scaling parameters are used to convert the data points x, y
coordinates to the new coordinate system.
Example
TRI SCALING 010,000: DATAIN = DIGITIZER
COORDINATES,
DATAOUT = MAP COORDINATES,
NUMSCAL = 4,
XIN = 0.0, 0.5, 0.5, 0.0,
YIN = 0.0, 0.0, 0.5, 0.5,
XOUT = 1250, 2500, 2500, 1250,
YOUT = 5000, 5000, 6250, 6250 /
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILEIN
MFDIN
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
C*24
I

Name of the input file.
05

Default Value = 0
FILEOUT
C*24

Default Value = Based upon input file name
MFDOUT
XFLD

YFLD

05

Default Value = 1
Process
270
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
350
NUMSCALE
Number of scaling registration points.

Default Value = 4
XINPUTS
Array of up to 50 x coordinates for the scaling points in

the input x, y coordinate system.
YINPUTS
Array of up to 50 y coordinates for the scaling points in

the input x,y coordinate system.
XOUTPUTS
Array of up to 50 x coordinates for the scaling points in

the output x, y coordinate system.
YOUTPUTS
Array of up to 50 y coordinates for the scaling points in

the output x, y coordinate system.
Process
271
Landmark
User Grid Filter

Name
USER GRID FILTER
Alternate Name USER FILTER

Function
This process filters a grid by means of a user-defined filter operator

grid. The input to this process is GRIDIN, the grid to filter. You can
create a grid operator to filter your input grid in one of three ways:
you can use an input grid

you can use the parameter WGHT to define each node
manually
you can use the RING method to define the grid operator
The output is a grid file whose node values are determined by the
filtering process.
The methods of defining the grid operator for filtering your input grid
work as follows:
1.
You can define the grid operator from an input grid attached to an
MFD. The rows and columns of your input grid must be equal;
the grid must be a square. The grid can be as large as 29 x 29 if
compensation is applied, or 513 x 513 if no compensation is used.
Larger stencils require longer computation time.
If the grid operator is defined by supplying a grid file, consider the

number of rows and columns; ensure that the grid is square.The User
Grid Filter ignores the x and y minimum and maximum information in
the grid header.
2.
You can manually define the grid rate values for a grid up to
13 x 13 using WGHT.
3.
You can use the RING parameter to assign grid node values to
groups of grid nodes arranged in concentric rings.
If the grid operator exhibits ring symmetry, you can define up to 99

ring weights.
You can filter a grid that contains undefined values. These undefined
values can exist in the input grid data itself, or they can be caused by
faults crossing the grid. The User Defined Filter process has two ways
of compensating for the presence of undefined values in the grid you
have selected to filter. The first method is to use a ring-symmetric
compensation method for grid operators that display ring symmetry.
The second method is to use an asymmetric compensation method. If
you do not want a compensation formula applied, set CMPNSATE =
NO, and compensation for undefined values is not applied.
R2003.12.0
Process
272
Landmark
Example
This example is a grid with 25 rows and 25 columns. Using 13,13 as

the center point, we can calculate what the first 9 rings look like. The
table below lists the grid nodes describing the circumferences of the
first nine rings:
Terms Array Element (Row,Column): (25,25)
R2003.12.0
Radius
(11,10) (10,11) (10,15) (11,16) (15,10) (16,11) (15,16) (16,15

)
13
(12,10) (10,12) (10,14) (12,16) (14,10) (16,12) (14,16) (16,14

)
10
(13,10) (10,13) (13,16) (16,13)
(11,11) (15,11) (11,15) (15,15)
(12,11) (11,12) (11,14) (12,15) (14,11) (15,12) (14,15) (15,14

)
(13,11) (11,13) (13,15) (15,13)
(12,12) (12,14) (14,12) (14,14)
(13,12) (12,13) (13,14) (14,13)
(13,13)
Process
273
Landmark
The figure below shows the array of grid nodes. Rings 2, 5, 7, and 9 are
drawn through the points describing that ring.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1-------5--------10--------15--------20--------25
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + o n + a + + + + a + n o + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + n + + a + + + + a + + n + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a 9 8 7 8 9 + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 9 6 5 4 5 6 9 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 8 5 3 2 3 5 8 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 7 4 2 + 2 4 7 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 8 5 3 2 3 5 8 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 9 6 5 4 5 6 9 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a 9 8 7 8 9 + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + n + + a + + + + a + + n + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + o n + a + + + + a + n o + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
Parameters
Parameter
Name
GRIDIN
C*24
MFDIN
GRIDOPER
C*24
MFDOPER
FAULTS
C*24
MFDFAULT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
Name of the input grid file, the grid to filter.

05
Number of the MFD that contains the input grid file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the grid file to use as the filter operator.
0-5
Number of the MFD that contains the grid operator file.

Default Value = 0
Name of the fault file.
05

Default Value = 0
Process
274
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
GRIDOUT
C*24
MFDOUT
Range

Default Value = Based on input grid
05

Default Value = 1
CMPNSATE
Use of compensation for undefined values encountered

while filtering.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES = Apply compensations
NO = Do not apply compensations
SYMMETRY C*8
Type of filter operator symmetry determining how the

filter operator node weights are specified. Ignored if
GRIDOPER is specified.
Options:
NONE = The node weights for the operator are specified
(WGHT0101WGHT1313)
QUADRANT = The node weights for the upper-left

quadrant of the filter operator are specified
(WGHT0101WGHT0707). The remaining quadrants
of the operator are filled by copying and mirroring the
data from the upper-left quadrant
RING = Ring weights (RING1RING99) are specified.

The specified ring weights are copied to each
node in the specified ring.
WGHTiijj
R2003.12.0
Array of up to 169 values specifying the node weights for

row ii and column jj. Used if SYMMETRY = NONE or
QUADRANT. Ignored if GRIDOPER is specified.
If SYMMETRY = NONE, then up to 169 node weights
can be specified (WGHT0101WGHT1313).
If SYMMETRY = QUADRANT, then up to 49 node
weights can be specified (WGHT0101WGHT0707).
Note: The rows and columns are specified as 2 digits,
0131.
Default Value = 0.0
Process
275
Landmark
Parameter
Name
RINGi
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
R
Range

Array of up to 99 values specifying the ring weights
(RING1RING99). Ignored if GRIDOPER is specified.
The center node of the operator is RING1, and each
successive ring is the next largest concentric circle around
the center node.
Default Value = 0.0
Process
276
Landmark
Vel Fun Time To Depth

Name
VEL FUN TIME TO DEPT
Alternate Name T T D II
Function
This process performs time-to-depth conversion using the velocity

function method. This module is called once for each formation of
interest, starting with a formation that has known depth at the top of the
formation. Each call can produce depth at the bottom of the target
formation. The velocity function can be specified by four different
combinations of grids and constants.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TOPDGRID
C*24
MFDTOPD
TOPTGRID
C*24
MFDTOPT
BOTTGRID
C*24
MFDBOTT
TOPVGRID
C*24
MFDTOPV
INTVGRID
C*24
MFDINTV
Range

Name of the input file that contains the depth at the top of
the formation.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the depth at the top of

the target formation.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains the time at the top of
the formation.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the time at the top of

the target formation.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains the time at the bottom
of the target formation.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the time at the bottom

Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains velocity at the top of
the target formation. Required if METHOD = LINEAR
GRIDDED.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the velocity at the top

Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains the interval velocity.
Required if METHOD = GRIDDED.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the interval velocity

grid.
Default Value = 0
Process
277
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ACCLGRID
C*24
MFDACCL
BOTDGRID
C*24
MFDBOTD
METHOD
TEMPUNIT
Name of the input file that contains the acceleration for

the target formation. Required if METHOD = LINEAR
GRIDDED.
05
Number of the MFD that contains acceleration for the

target formation.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file to contain the depth at the bottom
05
C*16
Number of the MFD to contain the output depth grid.

Default Value = 1
Type of velocity function model to use.
Default Value = CONSTANT
Options:
CONSTANT = Constant average velocity for the
formation
=
Grid of average velocity for the
GRIDDED
formation
=
Constant initial velocity and
LINEAR
constant
acceleration in the
CONSTANT
formation
= Grid of initial velocity and grid of
LINEAR
acceleration in the formation
GRIDDED
099
FORTRAN logical unit to use for a required scratch file.

The user is advised to rely on the program to set this
variable.
Default Value = 37
TOPVELO
Constant velocity at the top of the target formation.

Required if METHOD = LINEAR CONSTANT.
INTVELO
Constant velocity through the target formation. Required

if METHOD = CONSTANT.
ACCELER
Constant acceleration through the target formation.

Required if METHOD = LINEAR CONSTANT.
Conversion factor for converting units of velocity to units

of time. 2000 converts two-way millisecond seismic times
to meters/second.
SCALE
R2003.12.0
Range
Process
278
Landmark
Velocity Gridding
Name
VELOCITY GRIDDING
Alternate Name GRID VEL

Function
This process grids velocity data honoring user-supplied confidence

factors. The file that contains the data is assumed to contain x, y, z and
confidence factor fields. The algorithm builds up to five grids per
execution. The user can control the weighting of each data point
through the RADINNER, RADOUTER and POWER parameters.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
DATAIN
C*24
MFDIN
XFLD

YFLD

INFLDS
Array of up to 5 numbers of z fields to grid.

Default Value = Fields number of 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 are used
CONFFLDS
Array of up to 5 numbers of confidence factor fields, one

for each z field.
Default Value = Fields number of 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 are used
RADINNER
Radius of inner weighting circle. The weighting function

is 1.0 inside this circle.
RADOUTER
Radius of outer weighting circle. The weighting function

is 0.0 outside this circle.
POWER
Exponent on the weighting function in the ring between

RADINNER and RADOUTER.
GRIDS
C*24
05

Default Value = 0
Array of up to 5 output grid names.

The fields specified in INFLDS and CONFFLDS are used
to build the grids in the corresponding positions in
GRIDS.
Process
279
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MFDGRD
05

Array of up to 5 numbers of the MFDs for the output
grids, in the same position as the corresponding output
grid in GRIDS.
Default Value = 1
XMIN
Minimum x coordinate of the output gridding area.
YMIN
Minimum y coordinate of the output gridding area.
XMAX
Maximum x coordinate of the output gridding area.
YMAX
Maximum y coordinate of the output gridding area.
XINC
Grid increment in the x direction for the grids to create.
YINC
Grid increment in the y direction for the grids to create.
Null data value for the output grid.

ZNON
R2003.12.0
Range
Process
280
Landmark
Volume Report
Name
VOLUME REPORT
Alternate Name VOL REPORT

Function
This process generates a volumetrics report on a disk file, a

volumetrics total file from the data files output by the
VOLUMETRICS Process, or both.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DATAINS
C*24
MFDINS
TRANSLAT
C*24
MFDTRAN
TOTALS
R2003.12.0
C*24
Range

Array of up to 10 names of the RESULTS files output by
VOLUMETRICS Process.
At least one file name must be provided.
05

volumetric results files, in the same position as the
corresponding DATAINS file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the translation file that relates the polygon
Segment IDs found in the volumetrics data files with the
polygon names.
This file tabulates the Segment ID against a text field that
contains the polygon name and can either be a data file or
a vertex file. If this file is provided, then the polygon
name is output to the report instead of the polygon
Segment ID.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the translation file.

Default Value = 0
Array of up to 5 names of the input Volumetrics
RESULTS files.
The totals extracted from these files are added to the
report total to produce a grand total. The totals written to
the output file are not influenced by any input total files.
Note: These files are only used if a report file is being
created with a grand total.
Process
281
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MFDTOTS
DATAOUT
C*24
05

input TOTALS files, in the same position as the
corresponding input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output total file.
This file tabulates the polygon Segment ID versus the
total for each polygon, and contains the polygon names if
a translation file was input. The totals written to the
output file are not influenced by any input total files.
MFDOUT
REPORT
C*80
IFLDSEG
Field number of the Segment ID field in the translation

file.
IFLDTXT
Field number of the Text field in the translation file.

Default Value = First Text field
GRIDS
R2003.12.0
Range
C*24
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output total file.

Default Value = 1
Name of the disk report file to write to the output
formatted disk file. This file has a 132 byte record width;
that is, it is 132 characters wide.
Array of up to 10 names of the grids whose volumetrics

results are tabulated in this process.
Process
282
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TYPEREPT
C*24
Range

Type of volumetrics data to tabulate.
Default Value = POSITIVE VOLUME
Options:
POSITIVE VOLUME
= Volume of the body over the

positive area
NEGATIVE
= Volume of the body that is
VOLUME
below the base plane
NET VOLUME
= Positive volume reduced by
negative volume
POSITIVE AREA
= Area in the composite polygon
where the top surface of the
body is above the horizontal
base plane
NEGATIVE AREA
= Amount of area in the
composite polygon for which
the surface is defined and
negative
NET AREA
= Area in the property polygon
multiplied by the area scale
factor
NULL AREA
= Portion of the composite
polygon over which the surface
area of the body was null
SLICE THICKNESS
= Amount the baseplane
argument is biased by
SLICEINC until the cutoff
value is reached
NET SURFACE AREA
= Surface area of the top
surface of the body
over the net area
AREA OUTSIDE THE AOI
= Portion of the polygon
area that is outside the
grid limits
NEGATIVE SURFACE
= Amount of surface area
AREA
in the composite
polygon for which the
surface is defined and
negative
R2003.12.0
Process
283
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
BASE
C*4
Range

Whether the volumetrics slice option was used during the
volumetrics runs. If YES, then the slice base value
BASEVAL must be supplied.
Default Value = NO
Options:
= Volumetrics slice option was used
YES
NO
R2003.12.0
= Volumetrics slice option was not

used.
BASEVAL
Volumetrics slice base value. Used if BASE = YES.

Default Value = 0.0
SCALE
Scale factor to apply to the results.

For example, if the volumes stored in these file(s) are in
cu.ft. and you want the report in acre.ft., the scale factor
should be set to 2.295684E05, the conversion factor
between cu.ft. and acre.ft.
Default Value = 1.0
SCALETOT
C*4
Whether the scale factor is applied to the values taken

from the input total file(s).
Note: The scale factor is always applied to the values
taken from the input volumetrics data file(s).
Default Value = NO
Options:
= Apply the scale factor to the values
YES
from the input total file(s)
= Do not apply the scale to the
NO
values from the input total file(s)
TITLE
C*80
Array of up to 10 entries representing lines in the title on

each page of the report.
GRANDTOT C*80
Grand total text.

The grand total is printed at the bottom of the report. If
this parameter is not specified, then the grand total line is
omitted from the report.
SEGHEAD
Header text for the column that contains the polygon

name or Segment ID. This text string can contain up to
three lines of header text, each line SEGWIDTH long.
C*80
Process
284
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
SEGWIDTH
COLUMNS
C*20
COLHEADS C*80
COLWIDTH
R2003.12.0
Range
540

Width of the polygon Segment ID or name column.
Default Value = 20
Array of up to 10 entries describing the contents of each
column written to the report, excluding the total and the
polygon name/segment columns.
If a column is to contain the results from a single grid,
then the description for that column is the index of that
grid in the GRIDS array.
For example, a 1 causes the results for the first grid listed
in the GRIDS array to print in the specified column. A
column can contain a subtotal.
The description for a subtotal column is a list of the
indices of the grids whose results are summed to create
the subtotal, separated by a comma (,) or a plus sign (+).
For example, 1+2, or 1,2 would produce a subtotal for the
first two grids listed in the GRIDS array.
Array of up to 10 entries listing the header text for each
column described by the contents of the array
COLUMNS. Each text string can contain up to three
lines, each line COLWIDTH characters long.
1040 Width of all columns except for the polygon Segment ID

or name column.
Default Value = 15
PRINTTOT
C*4
Printing of a total column as the last column on the report.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO
PAGENUM
C*4
Printing of the page number in the top right corner of each

page.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO
Process
285
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
PAGEBIAS
Range

Number added to the calculated page number before it is
printed.
Default Value = 0
DATE
C*4
Printing of the date at the top of each page on the report.

Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO
FILEREP
C*4
Printing of the report file name in the top left corner of

each page on the report.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO
POSITION
C*8
Lateral position of the report on the page. This option

allows both the title and columns to be centered on the
page, or the column to be left-justified and the title
starting in the specified position right of the left margin.
For example, if POSITION = 10 then the title would be
indented 9 characters from the left side of the page.
If CENTER or CENTRE is specified then both the page
title and the columns are centered on the page. Any
numbers specified for this parameter must be enclosed in
quotes (e.g., POSITION = nn).
PAGELEN
Number of lines per page on the report.

Default Value = 58
DNUM
Use number of the optional output DATA BLOCK.

This Data Block is filled with the number of physical
pages and the number of logical pages in the report.
Generally, the number of logical and physical pages are
the same. However, if a single line of the report cannot fit
on one physical page, then each logical page consists of
multiple physical pages.
The Data Block must be of type INTEGER and contain at
least 2 items. The number of physical pages is deposited
in the first element and the number of logical pages in the
second.
Process
286
Landmark
Volumetrics
Name
VOLUMETRICS
Alternate Name VOLM

Function
This process computes the volume between the surface represented by

the input grid and the flat surface having baseplane value = Z, over a
region(s) of integration specified by an input polygon(s). The input
surface can be faulted.
The integration can also be limited to any or all:
regions where the input grid surface is positive

areas common to both the initial region of integration and one
or more constraint polygons
areas where a (non-faulted) constraint grid is greater than
some specified constraint value
Parameters
Parameter
Name
GRIDIN
C*24
MFDIN
FAULTS
C*24
MFDFAULT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
VERTICES
C*24
MFDVERT
RESULTS
C*24
MFDOUT
Range

05

Default Value = 0
05

Default Value = 0
Name of the input polygon vertex file. If not specified, the
region of integration is the entire grid Area of Interest
(AOI).
05

Default Value = 0
Name of the output control point file to contain the
volumetrics results.
05

file.
Default Value = 1
Process
287
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
AREASCAL
Area scale factor.

Default Value = 1.0
VOLMSCAL
Volume scale factor.

Default Value = 1.0
VOLMTYPE C*12
Type of volumes computed and printed for this surface.

Default Value = POSITIVE+NET
Options:
POSITIVE+NET = Positive and net volumes are
printed.
= Only net volumes are printed.
NET ONLY
SURFAREA
C*12
Computation and reporting of surface area.

Default Value = NO SURFACE AREA
Options:
= Surface area is determined and
SURFACE
printed.
AREA
= Surface area is not determined and
NO SURFACE
not printed
AREA
BASEPLAN
Base plane value.

Default Value = 0.0
SLICEINC
Slice thickness. Volumes are generated for slices of

thickness SLICEINC from the baseplane upwards to the
CUTOFF.
Default Value = 0.0
SLICELIM
Slice limit. Used if SLICEINC is not zero.

Default Value = 0.0
BOUND1
Bound for the first constraint grid, so that the region of

integration is limited to those areas where the surface of
the first constraint grid exceeds the value specified by
BOUND1. Required if the first constraint grid is supplied.
BOUND2
Bound for the second constraint grid, so that the region of

integration is limited to those areas where the surface of
the second constraint grid exceeds the value specified by
BOUND2. Required if the second constraint grid is
supplied.
Process
288
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CONGRID1
C*24
MFDCGRD1
CONGRID2
C*24
MFDCGRD2
CONPOLY1
C*24
MFDCPOL1
CONPOLY2
C*24
MFDCPOL2
Range

Name of the first input constraint grid.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the first input

constraint grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input constraint grid.
05

constraint grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the first input constraint polygon file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the first input

constraint polygon.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input constraint polygon file.
05

constraint polygon.
Default Value = 0
Process
289
Landmark
Water Saturation
Name
WATER SATURATION
Alternate Name AVERAGE SW GRID

Function
This process transforms constant porosity curves of water saturation

(Sw) vs. Height (H) above the oil-water contact (OWC) to an average
Sw grid across a given formation.
First, curves of Sw vs. H at constant porosity are transformed to
profiles mapped on a porosity (P) vs. H coordinate system. These new
curves are gridded using the line gridding algorithm to produce a grid
of Sw over P and H (Sw = f(P,H)). An integration is performed using
the formation structure grid(s) and the Sw = f(P,H) grid to produce a
grid of average water saturations across the formation.
The input water saturation curves should cover the range of height
above OWC to be found in top and bottom grids and the range of
porosity found in porosity grid. The gridding process extrapolates
beyond the data, but grid values in extrapolated regions should not be
considered reliable.
Two types of files are acceptable for input: profiles and contours. (For
a description of these file types, see Appendix D. Import/Export in
the Z-MAP Plus Reference manual.)
Notes
If only one curve is input, Sw is assumed independent of porosity

throughout the formation and the porosity value on the file is ignored.
(It can be any arbitrary non-ZNON value.) In this case the results are
independent of the values in, or absence of, a porosity grid.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
TOPGRID
C*24
MFDTOP
BOTGRID
C*24
MFDBOT
MIDGRID
C*24
Range

Name of the formation top grid. Required if FORMSRCE
= TOP+BOTTOM.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the top grid.

Default Value = 0
Name of the formation bottom grid. Required if
FORMSRCE = TOP+BOTTOM.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the bottom grid.

Default Value = 0
Name of the formation midpoint grid. Required if
FORMSRCE = MIDPOINT.
Process
290
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
MFDMID
PORGRID
C*24
MFDPOR
PCURVES
C*24
MFDPCRV
Range
05
Number of the MFD that contains the midpoint grid.

Default Value = 0
Name of the formation porosity grid.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the porosity grid.

Default Value = 0
Name of the input water saturation (Sw) data. Required if
the input data shows Sw to vary with porosity.
These are digitized curves of constant porosity from a
surface defined with Sw as x value and height above oil
water contact (OWC) as y value. Each record contains an
X field of Sw, a Y field of height above OWC, a Segment
ID field, and a Z Value field of porosity that is constant
for each curve. See Function section for more
information.
05
PORHTOUT C*24
MFDPHOUT
PORHTIN
C*24
MFDPHIN
AVESWOUT C*24
R2003.12.0
Number of the MFD that contains the input water

saturation data.
Default Value = 0
Name of output grid of Sw as a function of porosity and
height.
This is an intermediate file, but it may need to be
preserved for user examination and possibly even editing.
Used if OUTTYPE = POROSITY+HEIGHT or BOTH.
Default Value = Based on TOPGRID or MIDGRID
05
Number of the MFD to contain the output water

saturation grid as a function of porosity and height.
Default Value = 1
Name of input grid of Sw as a function of porosity and
height. Used if OUTTYPE = WATER. SATURATION or
BOTH
Default Value = PORHTOUT
05
Number of the MFD that contains the input water

saturation grid as a function of porosity and height.
Default Value = MFDPHOUT
Name of output grid of average water saturation (Sw) as a
function of x and y over the area of the formation. Used if
OUTTYPE = WATER SATURATION or BOTH.
Default Value = Based on PORHTOUT
Process
291
Landmark
Parameter
Name
MFDAVESW
Data
Type
I
FORMSRCE C*12
OUTTYPE
C*16
Range
05

Number of the MFD to contain the output water
saturation grid as a function of x and Y.
Default Value = 1
Source of the formation.
Default Value = TOP+BOTTOM
Options:
TOP+BOTTOM = Use the top and bottom formation
guide
=
Use the midpoint grid
MIDPOINT
Phase of water saturation.
Options:
= Phase 1: Sw as a function of
POROSITY+
Porosity and Height
HEIGHT
= Phase 2: Sw as a function of x and
WATER
Y
SATURATION
BOTH
R2003.12.0
= Both Phase 1 and Phase 2
PORINC
Grid increment for the porosity (X) coordinate for the

output water saturation grid as a function of porosity and
height.
Default Value = Calculated
HGTINC
Grid increment for the height (Y) coordinate for output

water saturation grid as a function of porosity and height.
Default Value = Calculated
WATERSAT
Water saturation value assumed at a height of zero.

Default Value = 100
OWCELEV
Elevation of OWC, in coordinate system of top and

bottom or midpoint structure grids. If structure is
expressed as height above OWC, then set OWCELEV
= 0.
Default Value = 0
Process
292
Landmark
Write Cell Table

Name
WRITE CELL TABLE
Alternate Name WRITE CELL FILE

Function
This process writes a RESIN cell table to formatted output files, with
the cell table geometry going to its own file, and each field of the cell
table whose field number is listed goes to a file of its own.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
CELLFILE
C*24
MFDCELL
R2003.12.0
Range

Name of the input RESIN cell table.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the cell table.

Default Value = 0
MODEL
C*8
Target reservoir simulator type.

Default Value = GCOMP
Options:
THERM
RESS
GAS3D
GCOMP
DISKFILE
C*80
Name of the formatted output cell table file to contain the

geometry of the cell table.
INFLDS
Array of up to 20 field numbers indicating which cell

table fields are written to the formatted output file.
Required if VALUES are not specified.
If the property is constant, then as an alternative to
specifying a field number, the corresponding entry in the
VALUES array can be specified, as the invoked constant.
VALUES
Array of up to 20 constant values. Required if INFLDS

are not specified.
Certain parameters required by some simulators can just
be constant values, rather than being a field of the cell
table. In this event, its entry in the INFLDS list is empty
and its constant value is specified in the corresponding
entry is the VALUES list.
Process
293
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
PROPNAMS C*24
Array of up to 20 property names, one for each field, in

the same position as the corresponding field in INFLDS.
Since these property names differ for different simulator
models, the program cannot just default to the name that
was given to the ZIMS field. For at least one simulator,
the set of valid names is limited.
OUTFILES
Array of up to 20 names for the formatted output files.

If there are any fields written to a formatted output file,
the name for that fields disk file must be supplied.
C*80
Process
294
Landmark
Write Resin Faults

Name
WRITE RESIN FAULTS
Alternate Name WRITE FAULTS

Function
This process writes a RESIN rasterized fault file to a formatted output

file according to the desired Reservoir Simulator Model. A rasterized
RESIN fault file is a fault file in which the fault segments are parallel
to the lattice rows and columns, for use with reservoir simulators.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
FAULTS
MFDFAULT
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
C*24
I

05

Default Value = 0
DISKFILE
C*80
Name of the formatted output disk fault file.
MODEL
C*8
Target reservoir simulator type

Options:
THERM - (Currently unavailable)
RESS - (Currently unavailable)
GAS3D (Currently unavailable)
GCOMP
Process
295
Landmark
Write Resin Wells

Name
WRITE RESIN WELLS
Alternate Name WRITE WELL FILE

Function
Creates a formatted output file of well information according to the

conventions of the specified target reservoir simulator.
This process of creating a formatted disk file contains well information
that includes the well name and the well location relative to the RESIN
lattice coordinates. Other information may be required by particular
simulator models, such as well status required by the RESS simulator.
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
WELLFILE
C*24
MFDWELL
CELLFILE
MFDCELL
Name of the input well data.

05
C*24
I
Number of the MFD that contains the well data.

Default Value = 0
Name of the input RESIN cell table file.
05
Number of the MFD that contains the cell table.

Default Value = 0
DISKFILE
C*80
Name of a formatted disk file to contain the well

information.
MODEL
C*8
Target reservoir simulator type.

Options:
THERM
RESS
GAS3D
GCOMP
WELLFLD
R2003.12.0
Range
Field number of Well Name field in the input file. Used if

MODEL = RESS, GAS3D or GCOMP.
Default Value = First Well Name field
Process
296
Landmark
Parameter
Name
R2003.12.0
Data
Type
Range
XFLD

YFLD

ZFLD
Field number of Z Value field in the input file. Used if

MODEL = RESS.
Default Value = 0, none
WSTATFLD
Field number of Well Status field in the input file. Used if

MODEL = RESS.
Default Value = 0, none
Process
297
Landmark
Write Text
Name
WRITE TEXT
Alternate Name PUT INFO

Function
This process allows text or numbers to be written to either the ZCL log
file or a disk file. You specify the number of text strings or numbers,
including its format, and whether they are all written to the same line
or each to a new line. If you write to a disk file you can specify whether
to erase and write a new file or to append to an existing file.
The user can, in conjunction with other ZCL processes like DATA
BLOCK LOAD, create an external data file that the user can import to
an MFD using the IMPORT Process.
Maximum Record Length
The maximum record length is 80 characters.
Example
R2003.12.0
DATA:10
HOWMANY=5, DATATYPE=REAL, DATASIZE=1,

VALUE = 1.1,
2.2,
3.3,
4.4,
5.5
/
WRITETEXT:
DISKFILE=real.out,
REALOUTS= #10(1), 9, 10.3, 10., #10(5),
NEWLINE=NO
FORMATS=F15.7,
/
DATA:20
HOWMANY=5, DATATYPE=TEXT, DATASIZE=10,

VALUE = ONE,
TWO,
THREE,
FOUR,
FIVE,
/
WRITETEXT:
DISKFILE=text.out,
TEXTOUTS=#20(1), TEN, NINE, #20(2), #20(5)
NEWLINE=NO,
NUMCHARS= 10
/
Process
298
Landmark
Parameters
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
DISKFILE
C*80
Name of a formatted disk file to contain the information

to export. If this parameter is blank, the information is
written to the ZCL log (screen or a file) as ZCL executes.
Note: If DISKFILE = STDOUT or STDERR, then the
output is piped to these locations (standard C
programming lingo).
NEWFILE
C*8
Overwrite or concatenate to DISKFILE if it already

exists.
Default Value = NEW
Options:
= Constant average velocity for the
NEW
formation
= Grid of average velocity for the
APPEND
formation
NEWLINE
C*4
Place each entry in TEXTOUTS or REALOUTS on a

new line or concatenate to the end of the same line.
Default Value = YES
Options:
TEXTOUTS
C*80
NUMCHARS
JUSTCHRS
C*8
Range
YES
= Place each entry on a new line
NO
= Concatenate the entries at the end

of the same line
Array of up to 20 character strings to write either to the

specified DISKFILE or to the ZCL log.
180
Array of up to 20 integers defining the length of and in the

same position as the corresponding TEXTOUTS entry. If
necessary, each TEXTOUTS string is padded to this size.
Default Value = 80
Array of up to 20 strings specifying whether the
TEXTOUTS string is left or right justified, in the same
position as the corresponding TEXTOUTS entry.
Options:
= Left justify the string
LEFT
RIGHT
R2003.12.0
= Right justify the string
Process
299
Landmark
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
Range
REALOUTS
Array of up to 20 floating point values to write to

DISKFILE.
If an integer value, DATA BLOCK entry, or MACRO
parameter is specified, then it is converted to a real value
before being used.
FORMATS
C*20
An array of up to 20 FORTRAN formats, in the same

position as the corresponding REALOUTS value.
Default Value = F15.7
ORDERS
C*4
Array of up to 40 strings, one for each TEXTOUTS and

REALOUTS parameter value, specifying the order in
which the information is written.
Default Value = All available TEXTOUTS strings are
written followed by all available REALOUTS
values
Options:
= Print the next TEXTOUTS string
TEXT
REAL
R2003.12.0
= Print the next REALOUTS string
Process
300
Landmark
ZGF Info
Name
ZGF INFO
Alternate Name
Function
This process provides information on a graphics file. A report is

generated for each picture. The report includes picture name, area of
interest details, and a graphic segment list (LGBs). The report can be
written to a formatted disk file, or displayed to the screen.
Parameters
R2003.12.0
Parameter
Name
Data
Type
ZGFNAME
C*80
Name of graphics file for which information is displayed.
LGBTYPES
C*12
Display of the LGBs of each picture.

Default Value = DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY
NO DISPLAY
HEADERS
C*12
Display of picture information. This includes Area of

Interest information.
Default Value = DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY
NO DISPLAY
DISKFILE
C*80
Name of the formatted disk file used for writing the

output. If blank, then the output is displayed to the screen.
Process
301
Landmark
Index
A
APPEND XY177-178
ASSM34-35
AVERAGE SW GRID289-291
FLT RASTER166
C
CELL VAL = WELL VAL170
CHANGE MFD NAME168
CLIP POLYGON62-63
COMPRESS MFD225
COMPRESS ZGF226
CP GRID QA156-158
D
DATA POSTING64-65
DATA POSTING NEW66-98
DATA SUBSETTING191-208
DATA TO DATA214-217
DLS POSTING100-102
DRAW LINES112-114
G
GRID PATCHING21
GRID POSTING103-104
GRID TO GRID218-220
GRID VEL278-279
I
INIT167
INTERSECT SURFS228
L
LATTICE POSTING105
LEASE POSTING106-111
LIST FILES212
location edit191-194, 195-203
N
E
E PRJ155
edit
location191-194, 195-203
range191-194, 195-197, 206-208
thinning191-197, 203-206
R2003.12.0
N ARR6-7, 8-12
NADCON1
NIV TIME TO DEPTH2-5
NIVA2-5
NORTH ARROW6-7, 8-12
NTS POSTING115-122
Index
301
Landmark
OVERLAY13-14
OVERPOST RESOLVE15-20
RANGE EDIT164-165
range edit191-194, 195-197, 206-208
RASTERIZE FAULTS166
REINITIALIZE167
RELIEF SHADING210-211
REMOVE CHAR DUPS253
REN PIC169
RENAME MFD168
RENAME PICT169
RESET CELL TO WELL170
RESOLVE OVERPOST15-20
ROTA171-172
ROTATE DATA171-172
P
P GRID40-46
P TEXT150-151
PATCH GRID21
PIC STATS36-39
PICT22-33
PICTURE22-33
PICTURE ASSEMBLY34-35
PICTURE STATS36-39
POINT GRID PLUS47-61, 161-163
POINT GRIDDING40-46
POLYGON CLIP62-63
POST DATA64-65
POST DATA NEW66-98
POST DLS100-102
POST GRID NODES103-104
POST LATTICE105
POST LEASE106-111
POST LINES112-114
POST NTS115-122
POST SEISMIC123-131
POST SEISMIC NEW132-146
POST STAR SYMBOL147-149
POST TEXT150-151
PROJ152-154
PROJECTION152-154
PROJECTION END155
PUT INFO297-299
Q
QUALITY ASSURE156-158
QUICK VOL159-160
QUICK VOLUMETRICS159-160
R2003.12.0
S
S B LNAR175-176
SCAL173-174
SCALE BAR173-174
SCALE BIAS LNAR175-176
SCALE XY270-271
SEIS APPEND XY177-178
SEIS INTERP THIN179
SEIS THIN179
SEISMIC POST NEW132-146
SEISMIC POSTING123-131
SELECT191-208
SHADED RELIEF210-211
SHOW FILES212
SINGLE DATA OPS214-217
SINGLE GRID OPS218-220
SORT221-222
SPAWN223-224
SQUASH MFD225
SQUASH ZGF226
STAR SYMBOL POST147-149
STOP227
SURFACE INTERSECT228
SURFACES DIAGRAM229-248
SYNTAX249
SYNTAX ONLY249
SYSTEM PARMS250
Index
302
Landmark
T BLK263-264
T COORD265
T T D I257
T T D II276-277
TEXT251
THIN254-256
THIN TEXT FIELDS253
THINNING254-256
thinning edit191-197, 203-206
THREE D TIME TO DEPT257
THREE D TIMESLICE258-259
THROW GRIDDING47-61, 161-163
TIME MIGR260-262
TIME MIGRATION260-262
TITLE BLOCK263-264
TRANSFORM COORDS265
TREND267-269
TREND GRIDDING267-269
TRI SCALING270-271
TSLICE258-259
TXT251
WATER SATURATION289-291
WRITE CELL FILE292-293
WRITE CELL TABLE292-293
WRITE FAULTS294
WRITE RESIN FAULTS294
WRITE RESIN WELLS295-296
WRITE TEXT297-299
WRITE WELL FILE295-296
Z
Z3D229-248
ZGF INFO300
U
USER FILTER272-275
USER GRID FILTER272-275
V
VEL FUN TIME TO DEPT276-277
VELOCITY GRIDDING278-279
VOL REPORT280-281
VOLM286-288
VOLUME REPORT280-281
VOLUMETRICS286-288
R2003.12.0
Index
303

ZCL Volume 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ZCL Volume 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ZCL

ZCL Operators Manual,

Part No. 161335

2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

NIV Time to Depth ........................................................................................

North Arrow ..................................................................................................

Orthogonal Contours ...................................................................................

Overpost Resolve .........................................................................................

Patch Grid .....................................................................................................

Picture Assembly .........................................................................................

Picture Stats .................................................................................................

Point Gridding ..............................................................................................

Point Grid Plus .............................................................................................

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

Polygon Clip .................................................................................................

Post Data .......................................................................................................

Post Data New ..............................................................................................

Post Data to ZGF ..........................................................................................

Post DLS ....................................................................................................... 100

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

Projection End .............................................................................................. 155

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

Seis Interp Thin ............................................................................................ 179

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

System Parms .............................................................................................. 250

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

Volume Report .............................................................................................. 280

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

This process converts NAD27 latitudes and longitudes to NAD83

Input file name.

Output file name.

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.

Field number of the Latitude field in the input data file.

Field number of the Longitude field in the input data file.

Name of the output field to receive converted latitude

Name of the output field to receive converted longitude

Range Description and Defaults

= Convert from NAD27 to NAD83

= Convert from NAD83 to NAD27

Null data value for the file being created.

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

NIV Time to Depth

NIV TIME TO DEPTH

Alternate Name NIVA

This process performs Time to Depth conversion using normalized

for data input:

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

By specifying DNUM=10 in the NIV Process, the user has specified

for grid input:

ISOGRDI =TIME ISOCHRON,

Range Description and Default

Name of the input isochron grid. Required if the input is

Number of the MFD that contains the input isochron grid.

Name of the input horizon top depth grid. Required if

Number of the MFD that contains the input horizon top

Name of the input normalized interval velocity grid.

Number of the MFD that contains the input normalized

Name of the input horizon top depth fault file. Required if

ZCL Operators Manual, Volume 2

Number of the MFD that contains the input horizon top